7/19/18 12:38 PM QUADRIFOGLIO OWNER’S MANUAL OWNER’S QUADRIFOGLIO 2019

2019 GIULIA QUADRIFOGLIO Printed in U.S.A. Printed ©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. US LLC. ©2018 FCA S.p.A., used with permission. Group Marketing of FCA ROMEO is a registered trademark ALFA 19GA-126-AA 19GA-126-AA ROMEO GIULIA ALFA QUADRIFOGLIO First Edition Manual Owner’s 3391101 Cover.indd 1 VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- EQUIPMENT normal may require special precautions. FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a Special design considerations are incorporated into this All installations should be checked for possible interfer- FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio ence between the communications equipment and the available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please DRIVING AND ALCOHOL frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone vehicle’s electronic systems. disregard any features and equipment described in this Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of equipment must be installed properly by trained person- manual that are not on this vehicle. accidents. nel. The following must be observed during installation. WARNING: Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design The positive power connection should be made directly alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- Operating, servicing and maintaining a to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation The negative power connection should be made to body passenger vehicle or off-road highway drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals portation. factured. This connection should not be fused. including exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used the State of California to cause cancer and Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may birth defects or other reproductive harm. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on To minimize exposure, avoid breathing slower, and your judgment is impaired when you vehicles so equipped. exhaust, do not idle the engine except as have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC The antenna cable should be as short as practical and necessary, service your vehicle in a routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use well-ventilated area and wear gloves or only fully shielded coaxial cable. wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

3391101 Cover.indd 2 7/19/18 12:38 PM DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing . We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle. Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo. Youare advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, , and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time. In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo. For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact: Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center: P.O.Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872) Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada): P.O.Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English) Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French) READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components of the supply system. For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see the "Fuel Requirements" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The Engine

Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.

Respecting The Environment

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.

Electrical Accessories

If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact your authorized dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled Servicing

Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs. VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS Accessories Purchased By The Owner

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer. Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedals (mats, etc.). FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance with manufacturer's specifications. Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed. This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it. FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB (Citizen Band) radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate antenna is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer.

Caution!

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur. HOWTO USE THIS MANUAL Operating Instructions Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate. The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page. Warnings And Cautions While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: Personal Safety: Vehicle Safety: Note: This Owner’s Manual describes the Quadrifoglio model. Optional contents, including equipment meant for specific Markets or particular models, are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside of the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified with the wording (if-equipped). All data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. Symbols Some components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

IT CAN START READ THE OWNER’S DO NOTTOUCH WITH AUTOMATICALLYALSO MANUAL HANDS WITH ENGINE OFF

DO NOT OPEN THE CAP DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PROTECT YOUR EYES WHEN THE ENGINE IS PRESSURE GAS HOT

MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS KEEP CHILDREN ATA BURSTING OF YOUR BODY AND DISTANCE CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACH CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE FLAMES GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX This page is intentionally left blank GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

03016S0002EM Front View 1 — Headlights 4 — Doors 2 — Tires And Wheels 5 — Engine Compartment 3 — Exterior Mirrors 6 — Windshield

9 REAR VIEW

03026S0002EM Rear View 1 — Tail Lights 2 — Trunk Lid

10 INSTRUMENT PANEL

03036S0050EM Instrument Panel 1 — Headlight Switch 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Control System 2 — Air Vents 6 — 10 — Glove Compartment 3 — Multifunction Stalk 7 — Windshield Wiper Stalk 11 — Passenger-Side Air Bag 4 — Controls On Steering Wheel 8 — Information And Entertainment System

11 VEHICLE INTERIOR

03046S0001EM Vehicle Interior 1 — Driver Seat 4 — Hazard Warning Lights 2 — Power Windows/Power Mirrors Controls 5 — Alfa DNA Pro Drive Mode System 3 — Gear Selector/Paddle Shifter — If Equipped

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find important KEYS...... 14 information to help you become familiar IGNITION SYSTEM ...... 16 with the features needed to operate your ENGINE IMMOBILIZER ...... 18 vehicle, and how they function. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM ...... 19 DOORS...... 20 SEATS...... 25 HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 29 STEERING WHEEL ...... 31 MIRRORS ...... 32 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 33 INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 36 WINDSHIELD WIPERS ...... 38 CLIMATE CONTROL ...... 40 POWERWINDOWS...... 47 HOOD...... 48 TRUNK ...... 49 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 51 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS...... 55 ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS ...... 55

13 KEYS panic alarm will remain active for three Operation minutes, and can be deactivated: Key Fob Door And Trunk Lid Unlock By pushing the PANIC button again. Yourvehicle uses a keyless ignition Briefly pushing the unlock button on the system. This system includes a key fob Automatically if the vehicle speed key fob will unlock the doors and trunk and a keyless push button ignition. exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). lid, turn on the interior lights, and flash the turn signals once (if activated from The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows In both cases, the panic alarm is the Information and Entertainment you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk immediately deactivated. System). or activate the Panic Alarm from distances. The key fob does not need to Push and release the unlock button on the be pointed at the vehicle to activate the Warning! key fob once to unlock the driver side system. front door or twice within one second to unlock all doors and the trunk lid. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the into PARK, apply The current unlock setting can be the , turn the engine OFF, changed through the Information and remove the key fob from the vehicle and Entertainment System menu, so that the lock your vehicle. system unlocks: Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or All doors unlock on the first push of with access to an unlocked vehicle. the key fob unlock button. Allowing children to be in a vehicle Unlock the driver door on the first GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE unattended is dangerous for a number of push of the key fob unlock button. reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned Flashing of the turn signals upon 04016S0001EM not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal locking/unlocking the doors and Key Fob or the gear selector. activation of the courtesy light upon PANIC Function Do not leave the key fob in or near the unlocking the doors can be activated or The key fob contains a PANIC button. vehicle, or in a location accessible to deactivated through the Information and Should you ever feel threatened, push children. A child could operate power Entertainment System. For further this button and the vehicle security alarm windows, other controls, or move the information, refer to the Information and will sound. vehicle. Entertainment System Owner’s Manual To activate the PANIC function, push and Do not leave children or animals inside Supplement. hold the PANIC button for at least one parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat The doors can also be unlocked by using second. When the panic alarm is active, build-up may cause serious injury or death. the emergency key, located inside the the headlights turn on, the turn signals key fob. flash, the horn honks intermittently, and all interior adjustable lights turn on. The 14 Door And Trunk Lid Lock Pushing the lock or unlock button again Briefly pushing the lock button on the key will restart the lights turn on timer (if the fob will lock the doors and trunk lid, turn parking lights functions were already off the interior lights, and flash the turn active, it will remain active). signals (if activated in the Information This function is available only if the doors and Entertainment System). are closed. If one or more doors are open, these Replacing The Electronic Key Fob doors will also lock, and this is indicated Battery by a rapid flashing of the turn signals. The doors prepare for locking, which To replace the battery, proceed as follows: becomes active from the moment they 04016S0003EM are closed. The doors will unlock again 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward Removing Emergency Key only if the key fob is detected inside the and extract the cover pulling downwards. passenger compartment. 3. Remove the battery plug by rotating it counter clockwise. The doors can be locked by using the emergency key in the driver’s side door lock. Trunk Lid Opening Rapidly push the trunk lid key fob button twice to open the trunk lid. The turn signals will flash to indicate that the trunk lid has been opened. Remote Start

The remote start button on the key fob 04016S0002EM enables engine starting (push the button Key Fob Cover Removal 04016S0004EM twice within five seconds to start the Removing Battery Plug engine). 2. Remove the emergency key from its housing. Car Finder 4. Remove the battery from its slot and replace it with a new one of the same Push the lock or unlock button to type. remotely and temporarily turn on the turn signals and headlights. This is useful for finding the vehicle easily in a crowded area like a parking garage, for example. 15 Duplicating Keys IGNITION SYSTEM If you need a replacement key fob, go to Operation an authorized dealer. To activate the keyless ignition, the key General Information fob must be inside the passenger The following regulatory statement compartment. applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

04016S0005EM license-exempt RSS standard(s). Battery Location Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Proceed in reverse order to reassemble the key. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and Caution! 2. This device must accept any 04026S0001EM interference received, including Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button interference that may cause undesired The battery replacement operation must be operation. The keyless ignition has the following done with care, in order not to damage the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE modes: electronic key. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party STOP: engine off, steering locked. responsible for compliance could void the Some electrical devices (e.g. central door Request For Additional Keys user’s authority to operate the locking system, alarm, etc.) are still The system can recognize up to eight key equipment. available. fobs with remote control. ON: all electrical devices are available. To guarantee that the engine starts and This state can be entered by pushing the the vehicle operates correctly, use only ignition button once, without pressing the electronic key fobs specifically coded for brake pedal. the vehicle’s electronics. AVV: engine starting. This state can be If an electronic key fob is coded for a entered by pushing the ignition button vehicle, it cannot be used on any other once while pressing the brake pedal. vehicle.

16 Note: Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery With the keyless ignition in the ON with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing position: if 30 minutes pass with the children to be in a vehicle unattended is If the key fob battery is discharged, dangerous for a number of reasons. A child gear selector in P (Park) and the engine or others could be seriously or fatally proceed as follows to start the vehicle: stopped, the keyless ignition will injured. Children should be warned not to 1. Lift the front armrest. automatically reset to the STOP touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the position. transmission gear selector. 2. Lay the key fob on the key fob outline With the engine started, it is possible Do not leave the key fob in or near the found on the floor of the armrest to remove the key fob from the vehicle. vehicle, (or in a location accessible to compartment while pushing the The engine will remain running and the children), and do not leave the ignition in the START/STOP button to start the ignition. instrument cluster will indicate the AVVor ON/RUN mode. A child could operate absence of the key fob when the door is power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. closed. Be sure the parking brake is fully For more information on the engine disengaged before driving; failure to do so start-up, refer to "Starting The Engine" in can lead to brake failure and a collision. "Starting And Operating." Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave Warning! the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. 04026S0002EM Never use the PARK position as a Key Fob Placement Location substitute for the parking brake. Always Driving the vehicle with the parking brake apply the parking brake fully when parked engaged, or repeated use of the parking to guard against vehicle movement and brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious possible injury or damage. damage to the brake system. When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your Caution! vehicle. If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. 17 General Information ENGINE IMMOBILIZER possible to start the engine, contact an authorized dealer. The following regulatory statement Engine Immobilizer Operation applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/ devices equipped in this vehicle: The Engine Immobilizer system prevents Break-in Attempt icon is displayed unauthorized use of the vehicle by while driving, this means that the system This device complies with Part 15 of the disabling engine starting. is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a FCC Rules and with Industry Canada voltage drop). If the display persists, license-exempt RSS standard(s). The system does not need to be enabled contact an authorized dealer. Operation is subject to the following two or activated. Operation of the immobilizer is automatic whether the conditions: Note: vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked. 1. This device may not cause harmful When the ignition is set to ON, the Engine Do not tamper with the Engine interference, and Immobilizer system identifies the code Immobilizer system. Any modifications transmitted by the key. If the code is or alterations could cause the protection 2. This device must accept any function to be deactivated. interference received, including recognized as valid, the Engine interference that may cause undesired Immobilizer system enables engine The Engine Immobilizer system is not operation. starting. compatible with certain aftermarket When the ignition is brought back to remote starting systems. The use of Note: Changes or modifications not STOP,the Engine Immobilizer system these devices could cause problems expressly approved by the party deactivates the control unit controlling when starting, as well as the responsible for compliance could void the the engine, disabling engine starting. deactivation of the protection function.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE user’s authority to operate the equipment. For the correct engine starting All keys provided with the vehicle procedures, refer to “Starting The have been programmed in accordance Engine” in “Starting And Operating.” with the electronics on the vehicle itself. Irregular Operation Each key has its own code which must If the key code is not recognized during be stored by the system's control unit. starting, the Engine Immobilizer Contact an authorized dealer to have Failure/Break-in Attempt icon is new keys (up to eight) stored with a displayed on the instrument panel (refer code. to "Warning Lights And Messages" in "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel"). This condition leads to the engine turning off after two seconds. In this case, switch the ignition to STOP and then to ON; if it is still blocked, try with the other keys provided. If it is still not 18 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM If a second acoustic signal is emitted after the alarm is already armed, wait Alarm Activation about four seconds and disarm the alarm While armed, the alarm will sound in the by pushing the unlock button. Verify that following scenarios: the doors, hood, and trunk lid are closed correctly and then rearm the system by Opening of doors/hood/trunk lid pushing the lock button on the key fob. (perimeter protection) If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even Operation of ignition with a key which when the doors, hood, and trunk lid are is not validated correctly closed, a fault has occurred in system operation. In this case, contact an Cutting of the battery cables 04056S0003EM Passive Entry Door Handle Button authorized dealer. Movement inside the passenger compartment (volumetric protection — if When the alarm is armed, the warning To Disarm The Alarm equipped) lights on the panels of the interior front Push the unlock button to disarm the door handles will flash. Unexpected lifting/tilting of the alarm. While disarming, the following vehicle (anti-lift protection — if operations are performed: equipped) Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if Activation of the alarm triggers the programmed) acoustic warning and the turn signals. Two brief acoustic signals (if Note: The alarm system is activated by programmed) the Engine Immobilizer system, which is Doors are unlocked automatically activated when you get out of the vehicle with the key fob and lock The alarm can also be disarmed using the the doors. Passive Entry System, by grasping one of the Passive Entry front door handles with To Arm The Alarm 04046S0001EM a valid key fob in hand to unlock. For With the doors, hood, and trunk lid closed Lock/Unlock Buttons further information refer to "Passive and the keyless ignition system placed in The activation of the alarm is preceded Entry" in "Doors.” the STOP position, push and release the by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is lock button on the key fob. The alarm can detected, the system emits a further also be armed by pushing the Passive acoustic signal. Entry door handle button, located on the exterior door handle. For further information, refer to "Passive Entry" in "Doors.” 19 DOORS Locking And Unlocking Doors From The Inside If all doors are closed properly, they will automatically lock once the vehicle has exceeded approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” function active). Push the interior lock button on the driver or passenger side door panel trim to lock

04056S0003EM 04046S0002EM the doors. Passive Entry Door Handle Button Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button With doors locked, push the unlock button on the interior trim panel to Note: The alarm does not disarm when Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift unlock the doors. the doors are unlocked by inserting the Protection must be repeated each time blade of the emergency key, found inside the instrument panel is switched off. Note: The key fob may not be found if it the key fob, into the door handle lock is located next to a mobile phone, lap top To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive cylinder. or other electronic device; these devices Entry may block the key fob’s wireless signal. Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection — If To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g. Equipped during a long period of vehicle inactivity), GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To ensure the correct operation of the insert the blade of the emergency key, Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system, found inside the key fob, into the door completely close the side windows. handle lock cylinder and turn the To disable the function, push the emergency key to the right (clockwise) to Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button lock the door(s). before activating the alarm. When the function is disabled, this is indicated by the light on the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button 04056S0001EM flashing for several seconds. Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel

20 Locking/Unlocking Doors From The The system enables the doors and trunk Outside lid to be locked or unlocked without Warning! pushing any button on the key fob. When locking the doors from the outside with the doors closed, push the lock The key fob is detected only after the Do not leave children or animals inside button on the key fob. system recognizes the presence of a parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat hand on one of the front door handles. If The door lock can be activated with all build-up may cause serious injury or death. the detected key fob is valid, the doors doors locked and the trunk lid open. When and the trunk lid are unlocked (refer to For personal security and safety in the the lock button on the key fob is pushed, the Information and Entertainment event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as all locks are activated, including the open you drive as well as when you park and leave System Owner’s Manual Supplement for trunk lid. The trunk lid will be locked when the vehicle. Passive Entry Settings). it is closed. Note: The key fob may not be able to be Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the When unlocking the doors from the automatic transmission into PARK, apply detected by the vehicle keyless-go outside, push the unlock button on the the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, system if it is located next to a mobile key fob. remove the key fob from the vehicle and phone, laptop or other electronic device; lock your vehicle. Locking/Unlocking Doors From The these devices may block the key fob’s Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Outside In An Emergency wireless signal and prevent the with access to an unlocked vehicle. If the battery is discharged or the key fob keyless-go system from starting the is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the Allowing children to be in a vehicle vehicle. unattended is dangerous for a number of doors from the outside by inserting the Grasping the handle of the driver's door reasons. A child or others could be seriously blade of the emergency key, found inside unlocks the driver's side door, or all doors or fatally injured. Children should be warned the key fob, into the door handle lock depending on the mode set using the not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal cylinder and turn the emergency key as Information and Entertainment System or the gear selector. follows. (refer to the Information and Do not leave the key fob in or near the Lock — Turn the emergency key to the Entertainment System Owner’s Manual vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. right (clockwise) Supplement for Passive Entry Settings). A child could operate power windows, other Note: If wearing gloves, or if it has rained Unlock — Turn the emergency key to controls, or move the vehicle. and the door handle is wet, the activation the left (counter clockwise) sensitivity of the Passive Entry function Passive Entry may be reduced, resulting in a longer Caution! reaction time. The Passive Entry system can identify the presence of a key fob near the doors An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always and trunk lid. remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. 21 Door Locking 2. Remove the emergency key from the To lock the doors, proceed as follows: key fob housing. 1. Make sure that you have the key fob 3. Insert the emergency key in the driver and are close to the driver’s or side door lock cylinder and turn it to the passenger’s side door handle. left (counter clockwise) to unlock the door. 2. Push the Passive Entry door handle button or the Passive Entry trunk lid button, which is located next to the exterior trunk lid release button. This will

lock all doors and the trunk lid. Door 04056S0005EM locking will activate the alarm as well. Exterior Trunk Lid Button Note: After pushing the Passive Entry door handle button, you must wait two seconds before the doors can be unlocked again using the passive entry door handle button. This feature makes it 04016S0002EM possible to check whether the vehicle has Emergency Key Release Buttons been locked correctly by pulling the door handle within two seconds. The doors will GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE not be unlocked again. The vehicle doors and trunk lid can be 04056S0003EM locked by pushing the lock button on the Passive Entry Door Handle Button key fob or on the interior door lock. Driver Side Door Emergency Opening If the key fob does not work, e.g. because its battery is discharged or the vehicle battery is discharged, the emergency key can be used to unlock the driver side door. 04016S0003EM Emergency Key To remove the emergency key from the key fob, proceed as follows: Note: 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward The emergency key blade is not and extract the cover pulling downwards. directional and can be inserted indifferently into the lock. 22 To avoid leaving the key fob inside While pulling the handle, do not push the Trunk Lid Access the vehicle accidentally, the Passive door lock/unlock button on the handle. Approaching the trunk lid with a valid key Entry function features an automatic fob, push the opening button to access door unlocking function. the trunk lid. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the "door locking" button on the front door handles or lock button in the interior door lock switch panel is pushed, a check of the inside and outside of the vehicle for the presence of the key fob is made once all the open doors are closed.

04056S0004EM Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When

Locking 04056S0005EM If the key fob is detected inside the Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button vehicle, the Passive Entry function Note: automatically unlocks all the vehicle doors and flashes the turn signals. If the key fob is inadvertently forgotten inside of the trunk, and an If one or more key fobs are inside the attempt is made to close it from outside, passenger compartment, the lock button the trunk lid will not lock. With the doors on the key fob inside the passenger 04056S0003EM locked, the trunk lid unlocked, and the Passive Entry Door Handle Button compartment is temporarily disabled. key fob detected inside the vehicle, the The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an trunk lid will unlock again and the lights unauthorized key fob has been detected flash twice. close to the outside of the vehicle. If the Passive Entry function is disabled Before driving, make sure the trunk using the Information and Entertainment lid is closed correctly. System, the protections to avoid Trunk Lid Lock accidentally leaving the key fob inside The trunk lid of the vehicle may still be the vehicle are deactivated. locked by pushing the lock button on the key fob, pushing the door lock button on the door handles, or pushing the lock

04056S0001EM button on the interior door panel of the Interior Lock Switch Panel vehicle. 23 On vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, 2. This device must accept any The Child Safety Locks remain locked the trunk lid and the doors can be locked interference received, including even if the doors are unlocked. by pushing the button located near the interference that may cause undesired Note: The rear doors cannot be opened opening button of the trunk lid. operation. from the inside when the Child Safety Note: Changes or modifications not Lock is engaged. expressly approved by the party Unlocking The Doors With A Discharged responsible for compliance could void the Battery user’s authority to operate the equipment. Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if the vehicle battery is discharged. Child Safety Locks Rear Doors And Passenger Door To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear 1. With the doors unlocked insert the doors are equipped with Child-Protection emergency key from the key fob or a flat Door Lock system. bladed screwdriver into the door lock 04056S0005EM manual release lock cylinder. Exterior Trunk Lid Button This device can be engaged only with the doors open. System Activation/Deactivation The Passive entry system can be activated or deactivated using the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Information and Entertainment System. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the 04056S0008EM FCC Rules and with Industry Canada Door Lock Manual Release Lock license-exempt RSS standard(s). 04056S0007EM Cylinder Child Safety Lock Positions Operation is subject to the following two 2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder conditions: Lock position: device locked (door clockwise for the right door locks or opened from exterior only) 1. This device may not cause harmful counterclockwise for the left door locks. Unlock position: device unlocked (door interference, and 3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the may be opened from the inside) manual release lock.

24 Proceed in one of the following ways to SEATS realign the door lock device (only when the battery charge has been restored): The front seats can be adjusted to ensure maximum comfort for the occupants. Push the lock button on the electronic When adjusting the driver’s seat, keep key the shoulders resting firmly against the Push the unlock button on the door backrest, and the wrists within reach of panel the top of the steering wheel. The driver must also be able to fully press the brake Unlock driver’s door lock with the pedal. emergency key Operate the internal door handle 04066S0002EM Warning! Manual Seat Adjustment Note: For the rear doors, if the Child Safety Locks are engaged, and the 1 — Adjustment Lever previously described locking procedure is It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, 2 — Height Adjustment Button carried out, operating the internal handle inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, 3 — Recline Lever will not open the door. Instead, it will only people riding in these areas are more likely realign the lock release device. To open to be seriously injured or killed. Height Adjustment the door, the outside handle must be Do not allow people to ride in any area of used. The door central locking/unlocking your vehicle that is not equipped with seats Push the height adjustment button buttons are not deactivated when the and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in upward or downward to obtain your emergency lock is engaged. these areas are more likely to be seriously desired height. injured or killed. Seatback Recline Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a To adjust the seatback, lift the recline seat and using a properly. lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position Sparco Racing Seats — If Equipped and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and Forward/Rearward Adjustment release the lever. The adjustment lever is at the front of the seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward Power Seats — If Equipped to move the seat forward or rearward. The power seat switches are located on Release the bar once the seat is in the the outboard side of the seat near the desired position. Using body pressure, floor. Use these switches to move the move forward and rearward on the seat driver's seat up, down, forward, rearward, to be sure that the seat adjusters have or to recline the seatback. latched. 25 Seatback Recline The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch in the desired direction, and the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. Power Lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push 04066S0003EM the switch forward or rearward to 04066S0015EM Power Seat Adjustment increase or decrease the lumbar support. Seatback Width Adjustment 1 — Seat Adjustment Push the switch upward or downward to 4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons 2 — Recline Adjustment raise or lower the lumbar support. 5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons 3 — Lumbar Adjustment Height Adjustment The height of the seats can be adjusted Seat Cushion Extension — If Equipped up or down. Pull upward or push Lift the adjustment lever and push the downward on the seat switch, and the Caution! front of the cushion forward or backward seat will move in the direction of the to extend the cushion by a few inches GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE switch. Release the switch when the (centimeters). Do not place any article under a power seat desired position is reached. or impede its ability to move as it may cause Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped The seat angle can be adjusted in four by an obstruction in the seat's path. directions. Lift or push the front part of seat switch to move the front part of the seat in the corresponding direction. Forward/Rearward Adjustment Release the seat switch when the seat Push the seat switch forward or rearward has reached the desired position. to adjust to your desired position. Power Bolster Adjustment Push the power bolster adjustment 04066S0017EM buttons to regulate the width of the Seat Cushion Extension backrest through the lateral padding. 6 — Adjustment Lever

26 Driver Memory Seat Do not ride with the seatback reclined so A quick push of the heated seat button Storing and recalling can be done with the that the shoulder belt is no longer resting will select the heat levels in order of ignition in the ON mode, vehicle speed at against your chest. In a collision you could highest to lowest. A fourth push of the 0 mph (0 km/h), and the driver’s side door slide under the seat belt, which could result button will turn the heated seat off. closed, or for three minutes after having in serious injury or death. The “minimum” setting is automatically opened the driver's side door. An audible deactivated once a certain period of time chime is heard to confirm a memory Heated Seats — If Equipped has elapsed. This varies on a profile is set or recalled. To set a memory Note: If your vehicle is equipped with case-by-case basis, in accordance with profile, first adjust your seat (and power Sparco Racing Seats, they will not be the specific operating conditions. mirror position if desired) until you are in equipped with the heated seat feature. Rear Heated Seats the desired position. Then, push the memory button you want to assign the With the engine in the ON position, push If equipped with rear heated seats, the set position to for 1.5 seconds. When a the driver or passenger heated seat button controls can be found on the rear of the new seat position is memorized, the located on the instrument panel. center console and will function the same previously memorized position on the as the front heated seat controls. same button is automatically Note: To preserve the battery charge, overwritten. Recalling a memorized this function cannot be activated when position can also be done for the engine is off. approximately three minutes after the doors are opened and for approximately one minute after the engine is stopped. Warning! To recall a memorized position, push the assigned button briefly. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic 04066S0004EM1 illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, Warning! Heated Seat Buttons medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when Youcan select three heating levels: using the seat heater. It may cause burns Adjusting a seat while driving may be Maximum — three LED indicators even at low temperatures, especially if used dangerous. Moving a seat while driving illuminated on the buttons. for long periods of time. could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. Average — two LED indicators Do not place anything on the seat or illuminated on the buttons. seatback that insulates against heat, such Seats should be adjusted before as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the fastening the seat belts and while the Minimum — one LED indicator seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death illuminated on the buttons. that has been overheated could cause could result from a poorly adjusted seat serious burns due to the increased surface belt. After selecting a heating level, heat will temperature of the seat. be felt within a few minutes. 27 Rear Seats Partial Extension Of The Luggage Full Expansion Of The Trunk Compartment (1/3 Or 2/3) The rear seats allow for three Tilting the rear seat forward completely passengers. Extending the right side of the trunk allows maximum loading volume. allows you to carry two passengers on Proceed as follows: Note: Middle Seat: The rear seat is the left part of the rear seat, while designed as a 4+1 seat vehicle. The extending the left side allows you to 1. Completely lower the rear seat head middle seat is of limited use. It is carry one passenger. restraints. recommended that this seat only be used Proceed as follows: 2. Place the seatbelts so that they don't by a person who can use the backrest as a impede the movement of the backrest substitute for the head restraint. 1. Completely lower the rear seat head restraints. while tilting it. 2. Place the seatbelt so that it doesn't 3. From inside the luggage impede the movement of the backrest compartment, use levers 1 and 2 to fold while tilting it. down the backrests; these will fold down forwards automatically. If necessary, 3. From inside the luggage accompany the backrests during the compartment, operate lever 1 to tilt the initial stage of tilting. left part or lever 2 to tilt the right part of the backrest: it will automatically tilt Repositioning The Backrests forward. If necessary, assist the backrest Move the seatbelts to the side, making during the initial stage of tilting. sure that they are correctly extended and GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 04066S0005EM not twisted, and that they are not trapped Rear Seat behind the backrests of the seats. Make The seats and the seatbelts are sure the seatbelts are in the front of the considered components of the vehicle’s seatback and lift the backrests, pushing Occupant Restraint System. them back until you hear the locking click Note: Refer to the "Seat Belt Systems" on both latch mechanisms. in "Safety" for further information. Split Folding Rear Seat Warning! The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage 04066S0007EM Be certain that the seatback is securely area. Seat Release Levers locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not 1 — Left Side Seat Release Lever provide the proper stability for child seats 2 — Right Side Seat Release Lever and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. 28 Center Backrest Section Tilting HEAD RESTRAINTS The non-adjustable head restraints The center backrest can be tilted forward consist of a trimmed foam covering over Head restraints are designed to reduce the upper structure of the seatbacks and for a “Ski-Pass Through” feature from the the risk of injury by restricting head trunk. Before tilting the backrest, make are intended to help protect you and the movement in the event of a rear impact. passenger from neck injury. sure that the rear center seatbelt is not Head restraints should be adjusted so fastened and that there are not any that the top of the head restraint is Adjust the seatbacks to their upright, objects in the middle part of the cushion. located above the top of your ear. on-road positions so that the head Using the release strap, release the restraint is positioned as close as center part of the backrest from its possible to the back of your head. housing and tilt it using the head Warning! Front Head Restraints (Adjustments) restraint. — If Equipped

A loose head restraint thrown forward in The front head restraints may be a collision or hard stop could cause serious height-adjustable. To adjust them, injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. operate as follows: Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant Upward adjustment: Raise the head compartment. restraint until it clicks into place. ALL the head restraints MUST be Downward adjustment: Push the reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect adjustment button and push downward the occupants. Follow the re-installation on the head restraint to lower. instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. 04066S0008EM Center Backrest Section Tilting Do not place items over the top of the Warning! Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, Center Backrest Section Repositioning seat covers or portable DVD players. These Using the head restraint, lift the center items may interfere with the operation of All occupants, including the driver, should portion upwards, accompanying it during the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat its movement, and lightly push to make a collision and could result in serious injury until the head restraints are placed in their sure that it is properly attached. Make or death. proper positions in order to minimize the sure that the armrest is properly risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. attached by attempting to move it. If it is Sparco Racing Seat Head Restraints — Head restraints should never be adjusted not attached, repeat the operation. If Equipped while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly Yourvehicle may be equipped with adjusted or removed could cause serious non-adjustable head restraints on the injury or death in the event of a collision. driver's and passenger's seatbacks. 29 Note: To allow maximum visibility for the To reinstall the head restraints, proceed driver, if the head restraints are not in as follows: use, lower the head restraint all the way. 1. Hold down both the adjustment Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments) button and release button while placing the head restraint post into the holes.

Warning! 2. Then, reposition the head restraint to the appropriate height for the passengers. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their 04076S0002EM Warning! proper positions in order to minimize the Rear Head Restraint risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. 1 — Adjustment Button A loose head restraint thrown forward in Head restraints should never be adjusted 2 — Release Button a collision or hard stop could cause serious while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. vehicle with the head restraints improperly Note: To allow maximum visibility for the Always securely stow removed head adjusted or removed could cause serious restraints in a location outside the occupant injury or death in the event of a collision. driver, if the head restraints are not in compartment. use, lower the head restraint all the way. ALL the head restraints MUST be

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The height of the outboard head Head Restraints (Removal) reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect restraints can be adjusted. The head To remove the head restraints, proceed the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the restraint of the center seat, if equipped, as follows: can only be removed. The height cannot vehicle or occupying a seat. be adjusted. 1. Raise the head restraints to their For upward adjustment, pull up on the maximum height. head restraint until it clicks into place. 2. Push the adjustment button and the For downward adjustment, push in the release button at the side of the two adjustment button and lower the head supports. restraint while holding the button to the desired height. 3. Remove the head restraints by pulling them upwards.

30 STEERING WHEEL Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped Adjustments Warning! Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Sparco Racing Seats, the Heated Steering This feature allows you to tilt the Wheel feature will not be available. steering column upward or downward. It Do not adjust the steering column while While the engine is running, push the also allows you to lengthen or shorten the driving. Adjusting the steering column while steering column. The tilt/telescoping heated steering wheel button on the driving or driving with the steering column instrument panel. lever is located below the steering wheel unlocked, could cause the driver to lose at the end of the steering column. control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

To Adjust The Position: 1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle down to the open position. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.

3. Lock the desired position by pushing 04086S0002EM the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle to Heated Steering Wheel Button the closed position. When the function is enabled, the indicator on the button will illuminate. Warning! Warning!

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any Persons who are unable to feel pain to the after-market operation involving steering skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, system or steering column modifications diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical could adversely affect performance. Doing conditions must exercise care when using the so could void the New Vehicle Limited steering wheel heater. It may cause burns Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY even at low temperatures, especially if used 04086S0001EM PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY,and also for long periods. Steering Wheel Adjustment result in the vehicle not meeting Do not place anything on the steering 1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle type-approval requirements. wheel that insulates against heat, such as a A — Open blanket or steering wheel covers of any type B — Closed and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. 31 MIRRORS automatically folds the mirrors. The mirrors return to the driving position Electrochromic Mirror when the vehicle is then unlocked. This mirror automatically adjusts for If the door mirrors were folded using the headlight glare from vehicles behind you. power mirror control knob, they can only The electrochromic mirror has a power be returned to the driving position by button to activate/deactivate the rotating the knob again. automatic dimming/anti-glaring function. Note: The power folding operation can be enabled only when the vehicle speed is lower than 31 mph (50 km/h). They can only

04106S0004EM be manually controlled up to that speed. Power Mirror Control Automatic Dimming Mirrors 1 — Power Mirror Control Knob Like the electrochromic mirror, an A — Left automatic dimming feature is also B — Right available on the outside rear view mirrors C — Power Folding Position to prevent glare. The automatic dimming D — Neutral button is the same for all rear view mirrors.

04106S0002EM To adjust the selected mirror, push the Warning! Electrochromic Mirror Power Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE knob in the direction desired. When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Note: Once adjustment is complete, automatic dimming feature is rotate the knob to the neutral position to Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside deactivated. prevent accidental movements. convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much Outside Power Mirrors Power Folding on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Power Adjustment With the power mirror control knob in the neutral position, move it to the power Use your inside mirror when judging the size The power mirrors can be adjusted with or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex folding position. Move the knob again to mirror. the ignition ON. return the mirrors to the driving position. Select the desired mirror using the power If the power mirror control knob is moved mirror control. again during door mirror folding (from Heated Mirrors closed to open position and vice versa), Push the rear defrost button in the the movement direction is reversed. climate controls to activate the heated Automatic Activation mirrors. Activating the central door locking system from outside the vehicle 32 EXTERIOR LIGHTS The exterior lights can be activated only The DRL can be activated/deactivated when the ignition is in the ON position, from the Information and Entertainment Headlight Switch except for the parking lights. Refer to System, by selecting the following The headlight switch is located to the left "Parking Lights" in this section for more functions in sequence on the main MENU: of the steering wheel on the instrument information. 1. “Settings.” panel. This switch controls the operation The instrument panel and the various of the headlights, parking lights, controls on the will be 2. “Lights.” instrument panel lights, instrument panel illuminated when the exterior lights are light dimming, interior lights and rear fog turned on. 3. “Daytime Running Lights.” lights. Automatic Headlights Note: The Daytime Running Lights In addition, there are buttons for parking cannot be deactivated in Canadian sensors deactivation and stop/start. This system automatically turns the markets. Refer to “Starting And Operating” for headlights on or off according to ambient further information. light levels. Rear Fog Light Function Activation The rear fog light switch is integrated From the O (off) position, turn the light with the headlight switch. switch to the (AUTO) position. Push the button to turn the rear fog Note: The function can only operate with lights on/off. the ignition position cycled to ON. The rear fog lights turn on only when the headlights or parking lights are turned on. Function Deactivation The lights can be turned off by pushing To deactivate the function, turn the light the button again or by turning the switch to a position other than the headlight switch to the O (off) position. (AUTO) position. When the engine is stopped with the rear 04126S0001NA Daytime Running Lights (DRL) fog lights on, they will remain off the next Headlight Switch With the ignition cycled to ON, and the time the engine is started. 1—Parking Sensors Deactivation Button light switch turned to the position, if Parking Lights 2 — Parking Light, Daylight Running the dusk sensor detects sufficient Lights, Headlight Switch external light, the Daytime Running With the ignition in the STOP position, 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Lights will turn on automatically while the turn the headlight switch to the position to turn the parking lights on. 4 — Rear Fog Light Button other lights remain off. All of the parking lights will turn on for 5 — Stop/Start Button If the turn signals are operated, the eight minutes, and opening the door brightness of the corresponding Daytime activates an audible warning. Running Lights will be decreased as long as the turn signals are on. 33 To leave only the lights on one side Function Deactivation (right/left) illuminated, you must move This function is deactivated by turning on the multifunction lever (located on the the headlights, the side lights, or by left side of the steering wheel) to the side cycling the ignition to ON. that you want to remain on. With the parking lights on, the warning light on Adaptive Frontlight System (AFS the instrument panel will illuminate. Function) — If Equipped Note: Cycling the ignition to ON turns off This is a system combined with Xenon the parking lights, which were only headlights (Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp if illuminated on one side. equipped) which directs the headlights horizontally, and continuously and Headlight Off Delay automatically adapts them to the driving 04126S0020EM Multifunction Lever The “Headlight Off Delay” function delays conditions around bends or when the turning off of the headlights for a set cornering. The high beam headlights are turned off time when the ignition is cycled OFF. The system directs the headlights to light by pulling the lever to its original position. The function can be activated from the up the road in the best way, taking into The warning light/icon will turn off in Information and Entertainment System account the speed of the vehicle and the the instrument panel when the headlights by selecting the following functions in bend or corner angle, as well as the speed are turned off. sequence on the main menu: of steering. Flashing The Headlights The adaptive lights are automatically 1. “Settings.” Pulling the multifunction lever toward the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE activated when the vehicle is started. steering wheel will activate the high 2. “Lights.” High Beam Headlights beam headlights manually. The lights will remain on as long as the lever is held. 3. “Headlight Off Delay.” To activate the fixed high beam Once the lever is released, the lights will The side lights and the headlights stay on headlights, push the multifunction lever, resume the previous position. for a time that can be set between 30, located on the left side of the steering 60, and 90 seconds. wheel, towards the instrument panel. The headlight switch must be turned to the Function Activation (AUTO) or (ON) position. With the headlights on, cycle the ignition With high beam headlights on, the to STOP,the timer will then start. High Beam Indicator on the Note: To activate this function, the instrument panel will illuminate. headlights must be deactivated within two minutes after the ignition has been cycled to STOP.

34 Automatic High Beam Headlights — If When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is “Lane Change” Function Equipped exceeded again, the automatic Tap the lever up or down once, without The Automatic High Beam Headlights functioning is reactivated. moving beyond the detent, and the turn system provides increased forward If the multifunction lever is pushed again signal (right or left) will flash five times. lighting at night by automating high beam with the Automatic High Beam Then, the turn signal (right or left) will control through the use of a digital Headlights activated, the Automatic High automatically turn off. camera mounted on the windshield. This Beam Headlights function deactivates. To turn off the flashing before the end of camera detects vehicle specific light and To deactivate the automatic headlight the cycle, move the lever in the opposite automatically switches from high beams function, rotate the headlight switch to direction until the first click (about half to low beams until the approaching the position. way). vehicle is out of view. Note: If the system recognizes heavy Static Bending Light Function (SBL) — This function is enabled with the traffic areas, the automatic functions If Equipped Information and Entertainment System, remain disabled independently of the and can only be activated with the light vehicle’s speed. The SBL function utilizes Light Emitting switch turned to (AUTO). Diodes (LEDs) in order to better Turn Signals If the high beam headlights are on, the illuminate the street and increase the blue icon/warning light will illuminate To activate the turn signals function, light angle while turning. This function is in the instrument panel. move the multifunction lever, located on enabled by rotating the light switch to When the speed is higher than 37 mph the left side of the steering wheel, up or position or (AUTO). The SBL LEDs (60 km/h) and the function is active, the down until it reaches the detent. Moving activate when the speed is below 25 mph lights will turn off if the multifunction the lever upward flashes the right turn (40 km/h). lever is pushed again. signal and moving the lever downward This function can be activated/ When the speed is lower than 15 mph will flash the left turn signal. deactivated on the Information and (25 km/h) and the function is active, the The or turn signal will blink on the Entertainment System by selecting the function switches the high beam instrument panel. following functions in sequence on the headlights off. The turn signals turn off automatically main menu: If the high beam headlights are operated when the vehicle is brought back onto a 1. “Settings.” quickly again (pushing the multifunction straight course. lever towards the instrument panel), the 2. “Lights.” warning light/icon will illuminate in the 3. “Cornering Lights.” instrument panel, and the high beam headlights will turn on constantly until the speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h).

35 INTERIOR LIGHTS being drained once the doors are closed. After 15 minutes to preserve the If a light is left on accidently, the battery. Front Map Reading Lights overhead lights turn off automatically Timing While Getting Out Of The The front map/reading and overhead approximately 15 minutes after the Vehicle lights are mounted in the overhead engine has been turned OFF. After cycling the ignition to STOP,the console. Each light can be turned on by Overhead Light Timing overhead lights will turn on as follows: pushing the corresponding switch on the console. These switches are backlit for To assist getting in and out of the vehicle For a few seconds after the engine night time visibility. To turn the lights off, at night or in poorly-lit areas, two timed stops. push the switch a second time. modes are available to keep the interior lighting on after the engine is cycled OFF. For approximately three minutes when Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle one of the doors is opened. The overhead lights will illuminate as For a few seconds when the last door follows: is closed. For a few seconds when the doors are The timing ends automatically when the unlocked. doors are locked. For approximately three minutes when Vanity Mirror Lights one of the doors is opened. On the driver and passenger sun visor, For a few seconds when the doors are there is a light which illuminates the sun visor mirror when folded down. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 04136S0001EM locked. Overhead Console Timing is interrupted when the ignition is 1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch cycled to ON. 2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch Exiting Overhead Light Timing 3 — Overhead Lights Switch The overhead lights will turn off as 4 — Front Map Reading Lights Switch follows: 5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light After all doors are closed upon Switch entering the vehicle, the three minute 6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light timer will stop and a second timer will 7 — Center Reading/Map Light start for the overhead lights. This timing 8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light will end when the ignition is cycled to ON. 04136S0002EM Sun Visor Mirror When the doors are locked (either with Note: Before getting out of the vehicle, key fob or with key inserted on driver’s 1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover ensure that the overhead lights are off. side door). This will prevent the battery level from 36 The courtesy light turns on automatically Door Light Rear Overhead Light by lifting the cover. This vehicle is equipped with door courtesy The rear overhead lights are activated or Glove Compartment Light lamps that illuminate the entry way for the deactivated by two on/off switches driver or passenger when the door is located within the lights on the ceiling This light turns on automatically when the opened, and turns off when it is closed. above the rear seats. glove compartment is opened and turns off when it is closed. The light turns on and off regardless of the ignition status. The light turns on and off regardless of the ignition status.

04136S0004EM Rear Overhead Light 04136S0007EM 1 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light Door Light 04136S0003EM 2 — Driver Rear Overhead Light Glove Compartment Light As part of the "Passive Entry" system, 3 — Driver Rear Overhead Light Switch another light can be found under each Interior Ambient Lighting 4—Passenger Rear Overhead Light Switch exterior door handle. The brightness of the interior lighting can be adjusted via the Information and The light turns on when a door is opened. Entertainment System. Note: The light will turn off To access the adjustment function, on the automatically after a few minutes if a main menu select the following items in door is left open. To turn it on again, open sequence: another door or close and reopen the same door. 1. "Settings." Courtesy Trunk Lights 2. "Interior Ambient Lighting." The trunk features two courtesy lights. 3. "Lights." These courtesy lights turn on 04136S0005EM automatically when the trunk is opened The lights can be adjusted to seven Exterior Door Handle Light different levels of brightness. and turn off when it is closed. 37 WINDSHIELD WIPERS Windshield Wiper/Washers Windshield Wiper Stalk The windshield wiper stalk is located on the right side of the steering wheel. The windshield wipers will only operate with the ignition cycled to ON.

Caution!

04136S0006EM Courtesy Trunk Lights Turn the windshield wipers off when The courtesy lights will turn on and off driving through an automatic car wash. 04146S0001EM regardless of the ignition status. Damage to the windshield wipers may result Windshield Wiper Switch Note: If the trunk is left open, the lights if the wiper control is left in any position Operation: The switch on the wiper will automatically turn off after other than off. stalk can be set to the following 15 minutes to preserve battery life. In cold weather, always turn off the wiper positions: Instrument Panel Dimmer Control switch and allow the wipers to return to the Windshield Wiper Off. “Park” position before turning off the With the daytime running lights or engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing. headlights on, rotate the dimmer control High Sensitivity Rain Sensing. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to upward to increase the instrument panel the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle Low Continuous Wiper Speed. brightness and the control button icons. is restarted. Rotate the dimmer control downward to High Continuous Wiper Speed. decrease brightness. Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

04126S0055EM Dimmer Control 38 Windshield Wiper Operation The windshield wiper stops working three Rain Sensor strokes after the stalk is released, Rotating the switch to the position The Rain Sensor is located behind the followed by a final stroke six seconds activates the first (low) level continuous interior rear view mirror. This feature later to complete the cycle. speed of the windshield wipers in manual senses moisture on the windshield and mode. Mist automatically activates the wipers for Rotating the switch to the position Use this feature when weather the driver. activates the second (high) level conditions make occasional usage of the continuous speed of the windshield wipers necessary. Push the stalk upward wipers in manual mode. to the MIST position and release for a Rain Sensors single wiping cycle. This function is useful Rotating the switch to the position, to remove small deposits of dust from activates the first, less sensitive level of the windshield or morning dew. the Rain Sensing function. Note: This function does not activate the Rotating the switch to the position, windshield washer. To spray windshield activates the second, more sensitive washer fluid onto the windshield, the level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer washing function must be used. to “Rain Sensor” in this section for more 04146S0002EM information on how this system Warning! Rain Sensor functions. The feature is especially useful for road Windshield Washer Operation Sudden loss of visibility through the splash or over spray from the windshield Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel windshield could lead to a collision. You washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the to operate the windshield washer. might not see other vehicles or other end of the multifunction lever to one of obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the four settings to activate this feature. Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the windshield during freezing weather, warm windshield washer jet and the windshield The sensor has an adjustment range that the windshield with the defroster before and varies progressively from wiper still (no wiper with a single movement. The wipers during windshield washer use. and washers will continue to operate until stroke) when the windshield is dry, to you let go of the stalk. wiper at continuous speed (fast operation) with intense rain.

39 Activation Deactivation CLIMATE CONTROL Rotating the wiper switch to position Use the wiper switch or cycle the ignition Passenger Compartment Air Vents or activates the rain sensor. to STOP. The activation of the rain sensor system In the event of malfunction of the rain Side Air Vents is done by tapping the wiper stalk sensor while it is active, the windshield To adjust the position of the Side Air upwards while the switch is in the or wiper operates intermittently at a speed Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster position. consistent with the sensitivity setting of (2) in any direction. The variation in sensitivity during rain the rain sensor, whether or not there is Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2) sensor operation is also signaled by a rain on the glass for as long as the sensor to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Side stroke of the wiper (command acquired failure is indicated on the display. Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close and implemented). This stroke is also The sensor continues to operate and it is the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise executed with the windshield dry. possible to set the windshield wiper to will open the vent. If the windshield washer is used with the continuous mode or . The failure rain sensor activated, the normal washing indication remains on for as long as the cycle is performed, after which the rain sensor is active. sensor resumes its normal automatic The rain sensor is able to recognize and operation. automatically adjust itself in the Note: Keep the glass in the sensor area presence of the following conditions: clean. Presence of dirt on the controlled

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.). Presence of streaks of water caused by the worn window wiper blades. Difference between day and night. 04156S0002EM Side Air Vents 1 — Demister Air Vents 2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster

40 Central Air Vents Rear Air Vents To adjust the position of the Central To adjust the position of the Rear Air Air Vents, move the Central Air Vent Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster Adjuster (2) up or down. (2) in any direction. Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) Adjuster (3) to adjust the air flow. to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear Rotating Central Air Vent Air Flow Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close Adjuster (3) up will open the vents, the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating it will open the vent. down will close the vents.

04156S0004EM 04156S0003EM Rear Air Vents Central Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents 2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster 2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster 3 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster 4 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent

41 Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System Controls

04156V0005EM Automatic Climate Control System GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 1 — Driver Temperature Adjustment 6 — Rear Defrost Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button — Knob If Equipped 2 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Auto- 7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution 12 — Air Conditioning Button matic Operation) Selection Button 3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selec- 8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Au- 13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button — tion Button tomatic Operation) If Equipped 4 — Max Defrost Button 9 — Passenger Temperature Adjust- 14 — Driver Side Heated Seat Button ment Knob — If Equipped 5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10 — SYNC Button (Set Temperature 15 — Air Recirculation Button Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side

42 Air recirculation Rear Defroster Caution! The Climate Control System can also be System deactivation operated manually by using the buttons and knobs on the faceplate. Operating Mode The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which Manual selections will override the does not pollute the environment in the The Climate Control system can be event of accidental leakage. Under no automatic settings, which are stored until activated in different ways. It is circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids, the AUTO button is pushed. If the system recommended to use the automatic which are incompatible with the components intervenes for safety reasons, the function. Push the AUTO button and set of this system. automatic setting will take control of the the desired temperatures. system. The automatic system adjusts the Description The below operations will not deactivate temperature, quantity, and distribution the automatic (AUTO) function: of air introduced into the passenger The Automatic Dual Zone Climate compartment. It also controls air Control System adjusts the temperature Air Recirculation activation/ deactivation recirculation and the activation of the air and air distribution independently conditioner. between the driver and passenger. A/C activation/deactivation At any time during automatic operation, The system maintains the set SYNC function activation you can change the temperature, activate temperature inside the passenger or deactivate the Rear Defroster, compartment and compensates for Rear Window Defrost activation/ activate SYNC, activate or deactivate outside temperature change. deactivation the air conditioner, and activate or Note: The reference temperature is When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s deactivate air recirculation. The system 72 °F (22 °C) for optimal comfort internal temperature is controlled will automatically adjust to the new management. according to the set temperature. settings. The automatic setting will adjust the The following can be manually set or Climate Control Display Settings following to maintain comfort within the adjusted: passenger compartment: The Climate Control settings are visible Driver/passenger air temperature on the Information and Entertainment Air temperature from the driver/front System radio screen. passenger side vents Blower speed (continuous variation) The display on the Information and Air distribution from the driver/front Air distribution (seven positions for Entertainment System is a pop up passenger side vents driver and passenger) window (1), which is activated by pushing Fan speed (continuous variation of the A/C activation the buttons or turning the knobs on the air flow) Climate Control system. The indicator Front Defroster lights located on the number of buttons Compressor variations (for Air recirculation and knobs indicate that the selected cooling/dehumidifying the air) feature is on/off. If no operation is 43 performed for a predetermined time, the Rear passengers’ temperature is linked Air flow distribution between the pop-up will close on the display. to driver side selection. windshield demisting/defrosting Air Distribution Selection vents, and side/central dashboard Push the Air Distribution Selection vents. This distribution setting button on the faceplate to change the sends air to the windshield in sunny mode of air distribution. conditions. Air flow to the windshield and Air flow distribution to all vents on demister window vents to the vehicle. demist/defrost them. In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls automatically manage the air Air flow at the central and side distribution. When set manually, the dashboard vents to ventilate the 0521128655US respective symbols on the Information 1 — Climate Control Pop-up Display chest and the face. and Entertainment System indicate the air distribution setting. Air Temperature Adjustment Air flow to the front and rear floor vents. This setting heats the Fan Speed Adjustment Rotate the driver or passenger passenger compartment the Temperature Adjustment Knob clockwise Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase for warmer temperatures or quickest. or decrease the blower speed. The speed counterclockwise for cooler Air flow distributed between the is displayed with lighted indicators in the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE temperatures. The set temperatures are floor vents (hotter air) and the Information and Entertainment System shown on the Information and central and side dashboard vents display. Entertainment System. (cooler air). This air distribution Maximum fan speed = all indicators Push the SYNC button to sync the driver setting is useful on sunny days illuminated on the Information and and passenger air temperatures. during spring and autumn. Entertainment System display Rotate the passenger Temperature Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC Air flow distributed between the Minimum fan speed = one indicator function. This will set a new passenger floor vents, windshield, and front illuminated on the Information and Entertainment System display side temperature. side window defrosting/demisting Rotate the Temperature Adjustment Knob vents. This distribution setting The fan can be turned off by rotating the fully clockwise to engage the HI (maximum warms the passenger compartment Blower Speed Knob counterclockwise to heating) setting or fully counterclockwise while preventing the windows from the off position (all segments on the Information and Entertainment System to engage the LO (maximum cooling) fogging up. setting. To deactivate these functions, display are turned off). rotate the Temperature Adjustment Knob Note: To restore automatic control of to the desired temperature. the fan speed, push the AUTO button. 44 AUTO Button temperature and return to separate air In automatic operation, air recirculation temperature management. will be controlled by the system When the AUTO button is pushed according to outside environmental (indicator illuminated), the Climate Air Recirculation And Air Quality conditions. Control system automatically adjusts the System (AQS) following settings: Air Recirculation is managed according to Note: Quantity and distribution of air flow in the following operating mode: With the AQS function active and the passenger compartment Automatic engagement: indicator is after the internal air recirculation The air conditioner illuminated above the “A”on the Air system has been functioning for a set Recirculation Button amount of time, the Climate Control Air recirculation System enables air intake to cycle the Forced activation (air circulation Cancels any manual settings air in the passenger compartment for a always activated): indicator illuminated set time. The AQS function is disabled Selecting the AUTO function illuminates above the icon on the Air during the air changes. the indicator on the A/C button or . Recirculation Button The engagement of the recirculation If air distribution or the fan speed is Forced deactivation (air recirculation system makes it possible to reach the manual adjusted, the AUTO button always off with intake of outside air): required heating or cooling conditions indicator turns off to indicate that the both indicators not illuminated on the Air faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use Climate Control system is no longer in Recirculation Button it on rainy/cold days as it can increase AUTO mode. The three operating conditions are the possibility of the windows fogging. After a manual adjustment, push the When the outside temperature is low, AUTO button to resume the automatic obtained by pushing the Air Recirculation Button in sequence. recirculation is forced off to prevent the system. windows from fogging up. SYNC Button Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS) Function — If Equipped A/C Compressor Push the SYNC button (indicator When the automatic recirculation Push the A/C button to activate or illuminated) to sync the passenger side function is selected, the AQS function deactivate the A/C compressor (indicator air temperature with the driver side air automatically activates internal air illuminated when activated). The A/C temperature. recirculation when the outside air is compressor will remain off even after the This function makes temperature polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels). engine has stopped. regulation easier when the driver is At low external temperatures or in high When the A/C compressor is turned off, traveling alone. humidity, the automatic function turns the system deactivates air recirculation Turn the passenger Temperature off to avoid fogging up the windows. The to prevent the windows from fogging up. Adjustment Knob or push the passenger user can select the function again by If the climate control system can side Air Distribution Selection Button to pushing the Air Recirculation Button. maintain the temperature, with the A/C change the passenger side air turned off, the AUTO feature will remain 45 on and the AUTO button indicator light Adjust the air flow towards the When outside temperature is low, the will not switch off. windshield and front side windows system may turn the compressor on and turn air recirculation off for safer driving. To restore automatic control of the A/C Activate the Rear Window Defroster compressor, push the A/C button or the Switching Off/On The Climate Control Display the fan speed (indicators AUTO button. With the A/C compressor System off, the air speed can be set manually illuminated) and current air distribution using the Air Speed Adjustment Knob. setting Switching Off The Climate Control When the A/C compressor is on, and the Note: The MAX-DEF function remains System engine is running, air speed cannot be active for approximately three minutes Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob lower than the minimum speed (only one once the engine coolant reaches the completely counterclockwise to turn off indicator light is lit). proper temperature. the Climate Control System. Note: When the A/C is off the Climate When the function is on, AUTO mode will With the air conditioner off: Control system can not produce air that deactivate. The only manual operations Air recirculation is on is colder than the current outside possible are adjusting blower speed and temperature. Under certain turning off the Rear Window Defroster. The A/C compressor is off environmental conditions, windows could Pushing the button switches off the The fan is off fog up rapidly, since the air is not MAX-DEF function. dehumidified. The heated rear window can be Rear Defroster activated/deactivated Front Defroster And MAX-DEF Function Push the Rear Defroster button to Note: The climate control system stores GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear the previously set temperatures and Push the Front Defroster button Defroster. resumes operation when any button on (indicator illuminated) to defrost the The Rear Defroster will turn off after the system is pushed. windshield and side windows. 20 minutes or once the engine is turned Switching On The Climate Control While in MAX-DEF function, the air off. To reactive the Rear Defroster, push System conditioner will: the Rear Defroster button. To switch the climate control system on Activate the air conditioner Note: To avoid damage, do not apply in automatic mode, push the AUTO compressor when the weather allows stickers over the interior heating button. filaments of the Rear Defroster. Turn air recirculation off Stop/Start Humidity Sensor Set the maximum air temperature (HI) The climate control system manages the on both the driver and passenger side The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent the Stop/Start system. Stop/Start has the windows from fogging up. The AUTO engine shut off when vehicle speed is Activate a blower speed based on the function (indicator illuminated) must be temperature of the engine coolant 0 mph (0 km/h) to maintain comfort on for the Humidity Sensor to function. within the vehicle. 46 Stop/Start will deactivate in the Note: POWER WINDOWS following scenarios: In harsh climate conditions, limit the Power Window Switches The climate control system is in AUTO use of the Stop/Start system to prevent mode (indicator illuminated), and the the compressor from continuously The power window switches work with vehicle has yet to reach the set switching on and off. This will cause the ignition in the ON position and for temperature rapid misting of the windows and the three minutes after the ignition has been accumulation of humidity in the placed in the STOP position. When one of The climate control system is in LO passenger compartment. the front doors is opened, this operation maximum cooling is disabled. When the Stop/Start system is on, The climate control system is in HI Driver Side Front Door Controls the climate control system will always maximum heating The switches are located on the door take air in from outside, reducing the panel trim. All windows can be controlled The climate control system is in the probability of the windows fogging up. from the driver side door panel. MAX-DEF status System Maintenance When the Stop/Start system is active, the engine will restart if the inside In winter, the Climate Control System temperature changes significantly, or if must be turned on at least once a month the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is for approximately ten minutes. activated. Have the system inspected at an With Stop/Start system on, air flow is authorized dealer before the summer. reduced to keep the compartment comfort conditions for longer. Until the temperature drastically changes within the cabin, the climate 04166S0001EM control system will continue to maintain Power Window Switches the temperature while the engine is off. By deactivating the Stop/Start system 1 — Front Left 4 — Window with the button located on the Window Switch Lockout Switch dashboard, the climate control system 2 — Front Right 5 — Rear Left will take priority over the engine shutting Window Switch Window Switch off. 3 — Rear Right Window Switch

47 Window Opening This device is also useful if the windows HOOD are activated accidentally by children Push the buttons to open the desired Opening window. inside the vehicle. Each button has two position steps. Push The anti-pinch safety function is To open the hood, proceed as follows: activated both during the manual and the gently (first position step) for manual 1. Pull the release lever located on the automatic operation of the window. "burst" window travel, while pushing the driver’s side kick panel. same button harder (second position When the anti-pinch system is activated, step) activates "continuous automatic" the window closing is immediately operation. interrupted. Then the window closing is If the button is pushed again, the window automatically reversed and the window will stop in the desired position. lowers by about eight inches (20 cm) in Window Closing relation to the first stop position. The window cannot be operated during this Pull the window switch up to move the time. window upward. Hold the switch for at least half of a second and the window will Note: In the event of an error, or if the go up automatically. anti-pinch protection is activated three consecutive times, the automatic closing To stop the window during Auto-Up operation of the window will be 04196S0001EM operation, push or pull the window switch deactivated. In order to restore the Hood Release Lever again. correct operation of the system, the 2. Go to the outside of the vehicle and

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door window must be lowered. position yourself in front of the grille. Controls Power Window System Initialization 3. Lift the hood slightly. There are single window controls on the If power supply is interrupted, the passenger and rear door trim panels electric window automatic operation 4. Move the under-hood latch from right which operate the door windows. must be reinitialized. to left to release the hood. Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch To perform the initialization procedure, Protection which must be done on each door with the The vehicle may be equipped with an doors closed, manually fully close the anti-pinch safety device for closing the window to be initialized. windows. If the safety system senses any obstacle while the window is closing, it will stop the window’s movement and reverse it, depending on its position.

48 Closing TRUNK As the hood is extremely light, to close The trunk unlocking is electrically the hood, lower it to approximately operated and is deactivated when the 16 inches (40 cm) from the engine vehicle is in motion. compartment then apply a slight pressure downward and drop the hood. Opening Make sure that the hood is completely Opening From The Outside closed and fully latched. If it is not When unlocked, the trunk lid can be perfectly closed, do not try to push the opened from outside the vehicle using hood down but open it and repeat the the exterior trunk lid release button 04196S0002EM procedure located between the plate lights. Push Release Hood Latch To The Left Note: Always check that the hood is the button until you hear a “click.” The 5. Raise the hood completely. The closed correctly to prevent it from trunk lid can also be opened by quickly operation is assisted by the addition of opening while the vehicle is traveling. pushing the exterior trunk lid release two gas props which hold it in the open Since the hood is equipped with a double button on the key fob twice. position. locking system, one for each side, you must check that it is closed on both its Note: side ends. Do not tamper with the props and assist the hood while lifting it. Warning! Use both hands to lift the hood. Before lifting, check that the windshield Be sure the hood is fully latched before wiper arms are not raised from the driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully windshield or in operation, that the latched, it could open when the vehicle is in vehicle is stationary and that the electric motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious park brake is engaged. 04056S0005EM injury or death. Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button The turn signal indicators will blink and the interior lights will turn on when the trunk lid is opened. They turn off automatically when the trunk lid is closed. The lights turn off automatically after a few minutes if the trunk lid is left open. 49 Opening From The Inside Pull the lever in the direction indicated by Trunk Initialization When unlocked, the trunk lid can be the arrow to open the trunk lid. The lever Note: If the battery is disconnected or opened from inside the vehicle using the can be seen in the dark. the protection fuse blows, the trunk lid interior trunk lid release button, located Closing opening/closing mechanism must be under the dashboard near the engine re-initialized as follows: hood opening lever. Push the trunk lid Grip one of the handles and lower the release button until you hear a “click.” trunk lid until it clicks. 1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid. 2. Push the lock button on the remote control. 3. Push the unlock button on the remote control. Trunk Specifications Access To The Tire Service Kit To access the Tire Service Kit, lift the carpet in the trunk. For its use, refer to ”Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of 04206S0003EM 04206S0002EM Emergency” for further information. Interior Trunk Lid Release Button Trunk Lid Interior Handles

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Trunk Lid Emergency Opening Note: A lever can be found in the trunk lid over It will not be possible to open the the lock to allow opening from the inside. trunk lid with a key or by pushing the button in the passenger compartment when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk lid opening strap on the trunk lid lock before disconnecting the battery. Refer to “Storing The Vehicle” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the procedure. 04206S0004EM Cargo Area

04206S0006EM Emergency Release Button 50 Rear Cargo Tie–Downs — If Equipped INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Sun Visors There are four hooks inside the trunk for Glove Compartment The sun visors are located at the sides of attaching the cargo net or cables which the interior rear view mirror. They can be can safely secure the cargo. To open the glove compartment proceed adjusted forward and toward the side as follows: window. 1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the To direct the visor toward the side glove compartment by placing the window, detach the visor from the emergency key in the lock on the handle. interior rear view mirror side hook and turn it towards the side window. 2. Pull handle to open the glove compartment. From this position, the sun visor can also be extended toward to rear of the vehicle for additional blockage of sunlight. Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on the back of the sun visors and can be 04206S0005EM used even in poor light conditions. Rear Cargo Tie-Downs Note: Do not apply a load greater than 22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook. Cargo Net — If Equipped This is useful for correctly arranging the cargo and/or for transporting light 04246S0001EM materials. Opening The Glove Compartment When the glove compartment is opened, a light turns on to illuminate the inside of the compartment. 04246S0002EM Note: Do not insert large objects that Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger will prevent the glove compartment from Window closing completely. Always make sure that the glove compartment is Note: A rear facing child restraint completely closed when driving. system should never be fitted in the front passenger seat. Always comply with the instructions on the sun visor. Refer to "Child Restraints" in "Safety" for more information. 51 Homelink The following operation will delete the (keeping the programmable button manufacture’s standard codes and does pushed down). Description not need to be repeated during the Homelink is a fixed system installed on subsequent button programming: 2. If the indicator does not begin to flash the vehicle. It can sync up to three quickly, change the distance between the different devices that activate garage Push and hold the outer buttons (1 and HomeLink and the portable remote doors, gates, lighting systems, and home 3). After about ten seconds, the lighted control and try the procedure again. or office alarm systems. indicators will start to flash. Release both buttons. 3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, first Programming slowly and then quickly. When the indicator starts to flash quickly, release both buttons. Warning! Using The Homelink System The HomeLink system activates the Vehicle exhaust contains carbon garage door or gate motor, just like the monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your portable remote control. The car must be vehicle in the garage while programming the within the range of the garage door and transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious the ignition must be in the ON position. injury or death. Push the programmed button (1, 2 or 3). Yourmotorized door or gate will open and While the signal is being transmitted, the close while you are programming the 04246S0006NA

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE indicator is lit and the system (garage universal transceiver. Do not program the Garage Door Opener (Homelink) transceiver if people, pets or other objects Buttons door, gate, etc.) will respond. are in the path of the door or gate. Only use 1 — Homelink Button 1 If the HomeLink system does not this transceiver with a garage door opener operate, the original portable remote that has a “stop and reverse” feature as 2 — Homelink Button 2 control may be equipped with an required by Federal safety standards. This 3 — Homelink Button 3 alternative code (refer to “Alternative includes most garage door opener models 4 — Homelink Indicator Code Synchronization”). manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety If necessary, the original remote control features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, Note: Follow the steps below to begin can still be used to operate the system. on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety programming your remote control to one Alternative Code Synchronization information or assistance. of the HomeLink buttons: To check whether the garage door or gate 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink motor has an alternative code, proceed Note: Without starting the engine, button (1, 2 or 3). When the HomeLink as follows: activate the handbrake and place the indicator begins to flash slowly, move the ignition in the ON position. portable remote control one to three 1. Read the garage door or gate motor inches from the HomeLink system manufacturer manual. 52 2. The portable remote control seems to handbrake and turn the ignition to ON, have programmed to the HomeLink without starting the engine. Warning! system, but the garage door or gate can Proceed as follows: be neither opened or closed. 1. Locate the “Learn” or “Train” button on 3. Push the programmed button and Vehicle exhaust contains carbon the garage door or gate motor. The color monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With an and position may vary depending on the vehicle in the garage while programming the alternative code system, the indicator manufacturer (consult the garage door or transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious flashes briefly, and then remains off for gate manual). Push the “Learn” or “Train” injury or death. two seconds. This sequence is repeated button (this normally activates the for 20 seconds. Yourmotorized door or gate will open and setting warning light). close while you are programming the 2. Push the desired HomeLink button universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects Warning! (1, 2 or 3). When the HomeLink indicator are in the path of the door or gate. Only use begins to flash slowly, move the portable this transceiver with a garage door opener remote control one to three inches from that has a “stop and reverse” feature as Vehicle exhaust contains carbon the HomeLink system (keeping the required by Federal safety standards. This monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your programmable button pushed down). includes most garage door opener models vehicle in the garage while programming the manufactured after 1982. Do not use a transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious 3. Within 30 seconds, push the garage door opener without these safety injury or death. programmed key (1, 2 or 3) and release it. features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, Push the programmed button a second on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety Yourmotorized door or gate will open and information or assistance. close while you are programming the time and release it to conclude the universal transceiver. Do not program the operation. For some motors, the transceiver if people, pets or other objects operation will probably have to be Note: Activate the handbrake and place are in the path of the door or gate. Only use repeated a third time to end the setting. the ignition to ON without starting the this transceiver with a garage door opener The motor should now be capable of engine. that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This recognizing the signal transmitted by Proceed as follows: HomeLink and then open/close the door includes most garage door opener models 1. Push the desired HomeLink button manufactured after 1982. Do not use a or gate. and keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do not garage door opener without these safety Programming A Single Key features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, release the button until the last on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety It is possible to program another original operation has been performed. information or assistance. remote control on an already programmed HomeLink key by canceling the previously stored frequency. Note: To program Homelink using an Alternative Code, the car must be within range of the garage door. Activate the 53 2. When the HomeLink indicator begins Technical Information For After Sales Center Console to flash slowly, move the portable remote Service The center console storage compartment control 1 to 3 inches from the system If you are unable to set up HomeLink is located between the front seats. (keeping the programmable button successfully after following the above To access the center console storage, lift pressed down). instructions, contact After Sales Service the upper part of the center console as (HomeLink free hotline number If the indicator does not begin to flash shown below. quickly, change the distance between the 1-800-355-3515 ) with the following HomeLink and the portable remote information: control and try the procedure again. Vehicle make and model, including The HomeLink indicator flashes, first manufacturing year and country of slowly and then quickly. When the purchase; indicator starts to flash quickly, release Make, model, age and frequency of use both buttons on the remote control. of the original portable remote control (if The system previously programmed to known). HomeLink has now been deleted and the General Information new system is ready to use. This does not The following regulatory statement affect the other two HomeLink buttons in applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) 04246S0004EM any way. devices equipped in this vehicle: Center Console Deleting Programmed Keys This device complies with Part 15 of the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE It is recommended to delete HomeLink FCC Rules and with Industry Canada Warning! programming before selling the car. license-exempt RSS standard(s). All three keys are deleted Operation is subject to the following two simultaneously. conditions: Do not operate this vehicle with a console Proceed as follows: compartment lid in the open position. Driving 1. This device may not cause harmful with the console compartment lid open may 1. Push and hold the outer buttons interference, and result in injury in a collision. (1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the 2. This device must accept any indicator will start to flash. interference received, including 2. Release both keys. interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 54 Cupholder ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS Two cupholders are available in the SYSTEMS Carbon Fiber Active Aero Front center console. The following systems are used for This is an automatic device, working at reducing engine emissions: the vehicle speed, which allows higher Catalytic Converter reactivity at average speeds and higher vehicle stability at high speeds, Oxygen Sensors regulating the air flow into the lower part Evaporation Control System of the vehicle. Note: The system is not active in temperatures near or below zero, or when the Alfa DNA Pro selector is in the "Natural" or "Advanced Efficiency" positions.

04246S0005EM Cupholders In Center Console 1— Cover

To access the cupholders, slide the cover forward. To close the compartment, push the cover and it will close automatically.

04296S0001EM Front Fascia If there is a fault, a generic failure icon will light up on the instrument panel display, along with a message that will identify the type of malfunction. See your authorized dealer if a fault occurs.

55 This page is intentionally left blank

56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section gives you all the information INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . .58 you need to understand and use INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .60 the instrument panel correctly. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL .....65 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . .86 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ...... 86

57 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Instrument Cluster

05026S0006EM Instrument Cluster 1.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge With Overheating Warning Light 3. Instrument Cluster Display 4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The Triangle On The Left Side Of The Symbol Indicates The Side Of The Vehicle With The Fuel Door) 5. (Speed Indicator)

58 Tachometer Under normal usage, the temperature Note: If the low fuel warning light turns should remain around the middle of the on, refuel the vehicle at your nearest fuel The Tachometer indicates the engine digital scale according to the working station. Revolutions Per Minute (Giri). conditions. Adjusting Instrument Panel Lighting The warning light will turn on to signal Caution! (Brightness Sensor) the excessive increase of the engine oil Inside the Tachometer there is a light temperature. sensor capable of detecting light and In the event of excessive engine oil Do not travel with the fuel tank almost adjusting the brightness of the temperature, stop the engine empty: any gaps in fuel supply could damage instrument panel and the Information and immediately and contact an authorized the catalytic converter. Entertainment System display. dealer. Speedometer Engine Oil Temperature Gauge Fuel Level Gauge The speedometer shows the vehicle The digital indicator monitors the The digital fuel gauge monitors the speed in miles per hour and/or kilometers temperature of the engine oil and starts amount of fuel in the tank. per hour (mph/km/h). supplying indications when the oil When the warning light turns on, a temperature reaches approximately message is displayed, and a chime is 122° F (50°C). sound when 2.38 Gallons (9.0 L) of fuel are left in the tank.

59 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Instrument Cluster Display Description This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will display the vehicle mileage for a few seconds. Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings, and failure indications. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

05036S0001QV Premium Instrument Cluster Display

60 Reconfigurable Multifunctional 4. Speed Limit Warning Light Navigation instructions and call Display Shows information regarding the Speed information can be repeated, besides on Limiter function. the Information and Entertainment 1. Headlight Warning Lights System display, also in this area of the Displays the headlight warning light for 5. Compass display, these functions can be set on the either of the following active modes: Information and Entertainment System. 6. Reconfigurable Main Area Headlights Home Can display the following screens: Automatic Headlights. Home The parameters shown on the display, for the modes: Dynamic, Natural and 2. Gear Selector Information Trip A Advanced Efficiency are: Displays the following information Trip B (can be activated/deactivated Time controlled by the gear selector function: through the Information and Outside Temperature P = PARK Entertainment System) Performance Current Speed (shown if the repeat R = REVERSE modes of the Phone and Navigation N = NEUTRAL The screens can be selected, on rotation, functions are not active) by pushing the MENU selection button on D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed) Range the windshield wiper stalk. AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in manual (sequential) driving mode; – shifting to lower gear in sequential driving mode.

3. Forward Collision, Lane Departure, Cruise Control Displays operations for the following modes: Forward Collision Warning (FCW) 05036S0004NA Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If 05036S0002EM MENU Selection/Reset Button Premium Instrument Cluster Display Equipped Depending on the driving mode chosen Cruise Control (CC) or Adaptive Cruise using the “Alfa DNA Pro” (Dynamic, Control (ACC) — If Equipped Natural, Advanced Efficiency and RACE), the screens can be graphically different. 61 Trip A And B To reset the values, push and hold down the button on the windshield wiper stalk. The "Trip computer" can be used to display, for all driving modes (Dynamic, Performance Natural, Advanced Efficiency and RACE) The displayed parameters differ and with the ignition device ON, the according to the active mode. The modes measurements regarding the operating which can be selected using the “Alfa state of the vehicle. This function is DNA Pro” system are: characterized by two separate records, called “Trip A”and “Trip B” (the latter can Natural be deactivated by Information and 05036S0055NA Entertainment System), where the Premium Instrument Cluster Display “complete missions” (journeys) are In RACE mode, the consumption recorded in a reciprocally independent indication index is not active and a sports manner. gearshift indicator is displayed. The “Trip A”and “Trip B” are used to display sports gearshift indicator is represented the values relating to: by three yellow segments, if the third indicator, characterized by the word Distance travelled "SHIFT,” is on, it means that the gear Average fuel consumption should be shifted. Average speed 05036S0009NA Efficiency Consumption Graph Active trip The screen graphically reproduces some Fuel consumption indicator parameters closely linked to the efficiency of the driving style, with a view to limiting consumption. Advanced Efficiency GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

05036S0005NA Race Mode

05036S0007NA Premium Instrument Cluster Display 62 The displayed parameters are related to Displays the position by indicating the vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the cardinal direction. trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations (G-meter information), 8. Failure Warning Lights considering gravity acceleration as a Area dedicated to displaying failures, the reference unit. following symbols could be displayed on rotation: Lateral acceleration peaks are also indicated. Low criticality symbols (yellow amber). Race High criticality symbols (red).

05036S0011NA 9. Odometer Dynamic Driving Style Indicates the total miles travelled. The three center icons on the screen indicate the effectiveness of the driving Customer Programmable Settings style, linked to the following parameters: acceleration, deceleration and gear shifts, with a view to limiting consumption. The bar below the icons shows current consumption and the green line represents the optimal area. The globe lights up gradually according to 05036S0014NA lower consumption. Acceleration Stability Gauge The displayed parameters are related to Dynamic 05036S0015EM vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the Information and Entertainment System trend of the longitudinal/lateral accelerations (G-meter information), Multiple settings can be programmed by considering gravity acceleration as a the user using the Information and reference unit. Entertainment System. This section describes only the basic settings: Lateral acceleration peaks are also indicated. Units & Language 7. Vehicle Range Time&Date Indicates the miles left before the fuel Cluster tank is empty. 05036S0013NA Acceleration Gauge 63 To access the settings list in the Units & Language Clock & Date Information and Entertainment System, proceed as follows: 1. Press the MENU button to access the main menu 2. Select “Settings” from the main menu using the Rotary Knob

0401135760US 0501142760US Units & Language Menu Clock & Date Menu The following settings can be modified The following settings can be modified under the “Units & Language” menu: under the “Clock & Date” menu: Units: select US, metric, or custom. Sync With GPS Time: activates or The custom option allows for individual deactivates the clock synchronization 11036S0015EM selection of the unit measures through the GPS. If the function is deactivated, the options Set Time and 1 — ON/OFF Control And Volume Knob Language: change the language of the system Set Date are enabled. 2 — OPTION Button 3 — Rotary Pad Restore Settings: restores the factory Set Time: set the time manually 4 — MENU Button settings Time Format: set the time format to To access and change the setting, turn either a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock and push the Rotary Pad. Set Date: set the date manually

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Restore Settings: restores the factory settings To access and the change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad.

64 Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL The following pages consist of warning lights and messages. Note: The warning light turns on together with a dedicated message and/or chime when applicable. These indications are precautionary and as such must not be 0401135762US considered as exhaustive and/or Instrument Cluster Display Menu alternative to the information contained The following settings can be modified in the Owner’s Manual, which you are under the “Cluster” menu: advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this Warning Buzzer Volume: set the section in the event of a failure volume of the warning buzzer indication. Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip The failure indicators appearing on function the display are divided into two Phone Repeat: activate or deactivate categories: very serious and less serious repeating the Phone function screens on faults. Serious faults are indicated by a the instrument cluster display repeated and prolonged warning "cycle.” Less serious faults are indicated by a Restore Settings: restores the factory warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. settings Youcan stop the warning cycle in both To access and the change the setting, cases by pushing the button located on turn and push the Rotary Pad. the windshield wiper stalk. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the failure is eliminated.

65 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by ON turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the This light monitors various brake functions, including ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the approximately four seconds. The light should then turn brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. inspected by an authorized dealer. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been The light also will turn on when the parking brake is disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the does not show the degree of brake application. Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. have the system checked as soon as possible. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has Release the electric park brake, then check that the been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake warning light has turned off. Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer. and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) FAILURE The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to (amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates have the system inspected immediately. either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.

66 Warning Light What It Means What To Do AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. SEATBELTREMINDER WARNING LIGHT When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle. front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as OIL TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. dealer.

Warning!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. 67 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not possible. on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed no higher optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealer to have guaranteed. the tire repaired. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

68 Each tire, including the spare (if Please note that the TPMS is not a properly. Always check the TPMS provided), should be checked monthly substitute for proper tire maintenance, malfunction telltale after replacing one when cold and inflated to the inflation and it is the driver’s responsibility to or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to pressure recommended by the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if ensure that the replacement or alternate manufacturer on the vehicle placard or under-inflation has not reached the level tires and wheels allow the TPMS to tire inflation pressure label. (If your to trigger illumination of the TPMS low continue to function properly. vehicle has tires of a different size than tire pressure telltale. the size indicated on the vehicle placard Yourvehicle has also been equipped with Caution! or tire inflation pressure label, you should a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate determine the proper tire inflation when the system is not operating pressure for those tires.) properly. The TPMS malfunction The TPMS has been optimized for the As an added safety feature, your vehicle indicator is combined with the low tire original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS has been equipped with a Tire Pressure pressure telltale. When the system pressures and warning have been Monitoring System (TPMS) that detects a malfunction, the telltale will established for the tire size equipped on illuminates a low tire pressure telltale flash for approximately one minute and your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using when one or more of your tires is then remain continuously illuminated. replacement equipment that is not of the significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, This sequence will continue upon same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket when the low tire pressure telltale subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as wheels can cause sensor damage. Using illuminates, you should stop and check the malfunction exists. When the aftermarket tire sealants may cause the your tires as soon as possible and inflate malfunction indicator is illuminated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) them to the proper pressure. Driving on a system may not be able to detect or sensor to become inoperable. After using an significantly under-inflated tire causes signal low tire pressure as intended. aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended the tire to overheat and can lead to tire TPMS malfunctions may occur for a that you take your vehicle to an authorized failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel variety of reasons, including the dealership to have your sensor function checked. efficiency and tire tread life, and may installation of replacement or alternate affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping tires or wheels on the vehicle that ability. prevent the TPMS from functioning

69 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

Tire Pressure Low In any situation in which the message on the display is "See The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “Auxiliary Driving pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with the slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire indications that you find there. duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure. ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated. For further details about the active safety systems, refer to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the active safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns off.

70 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

REAR FOG LIGHT The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is activated.

ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL) In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as at moderate speed but without demanding excessive the engine is started. effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. and regulations of the country where you are driving.

Caution!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

71 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal as possible. collision alarm function is not enabled.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE The indicator light (or the symbol in the display) Refuel the vehicle. illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.

Warning!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

72 Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Indicator light What It Means What To Do PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. Headlight Off Delay This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the STOP position. LEFTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed. RIGHTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

73 Blue Telltale Indicator Light

Indicator Light What It Means What To Do HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.

Red Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved. The illumination of the telltale does not indicate the amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on the display upon entering the vehicle and also by activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and Entertainment System. The oil level can also be checked manually.

74 Caution!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Symbol What It Means What To Do In normal driving conditions: stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top ENGINE TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT up with coolant and check that the level is between the This telltale warns of an overheated engine condition. If MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator visually for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the the telltale comes on when the engine is started again. temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in will be sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is allowed high-performance driving): slow down and, if the telltale to cool whichever comes first. stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described above. POWER STEERING FAILURE If the telltale remains on, you could not have steering Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. assistance and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible. DOOR OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale illuminates when one or more doors are not Close the doors properly. completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with the doors open and the vehicle moving.

75 Symbol What It Means What To Do HOOD OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale turns on when the hood is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an open Close the hood properly. hood appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the hood is open and the vehicle is moving. TRUNK LID OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale turns on when the trunk lid is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an Close the trunk lid properly. open trunk lid appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and the vehicle is moving.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FAILURE The telltale illuminates, together with a buzzer warning, to Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.

Caution!

Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

76 Symbol What It Means What To Do ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING LIGHTS Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This telltale, along with the related message, signals a failure in the electronic throttle control system (ETC). Place the ignition in the off position and the shift selector in the park position: the telltale should turn off. If the If a failure is detected, the telltale illuminates while the telltale stays on with engine running the vehicle can still engine is running. be driven. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated. If the telltale flashes with the engine running, immediate intervention is required. A loss of performance, Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have irregular/high idling speed or engine stopping might take the failure eliminated. place and the vehicle may need to be towed. LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL This telltale appears on the panel when the engine oil level falls below the minimum recommended value. Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. The level must also be checked using the dipstick in the engine compartment (see chapter "Servicing and Maintenance.")

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE The illumination of the telltale signals a failure in the Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. automatic steering correction system.

ALTERNATOR FAILURE The illumination of the telltale with engine on Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. corresponds to an alternator failure.

77 Amber Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer System Failure Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine Immobilizer system.

Break-In Attempt The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt detected by the alarm system. Electronic Key Not Recognized The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and the electronic key is not recognized by the system. Alarm System Failure The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system failure.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT “Enhanced Accident Response System” in “Occupant The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred Restraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information. If it and the system has shut the fuel off. is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. not available.

78 Symbol What It Means What To Do ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPED The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time. Note: After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above until the oil is changed. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature.

Caution!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. pressure sensor failure.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. sensor failure.

79 Symbol What It Means What To Do FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Forward Collision Warning system.

START/STOP SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system the failure eliminated. failure.

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic windshield wiper.

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic low beam alignment.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Monitoring system failure.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer connection. lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators / Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate authorized dealer. lights.

80 Symbol What It Means What To Do

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. system failure.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Lane Departure Warning system.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the the failure eliminated. automatic high beam headlights.

81 Symbol What It Means What To Do AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this idling. case an engine performance limitation is carried out.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio the failure eliminated. system.

SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed the failure eliminated. Limiter system failure.

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly Tighten the cap properly. closed.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILURE The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to signal a failure in the electric park brake system. If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and because the park brake could remain activated even if remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands, automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant that the electric park brake is not operational. controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the park brake following the emergency disengagement procedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.” GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning!

If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.

82 Symbol What It Means What To Do

LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPED This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.” coolant level is low.

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. (ACC) is not operating and needs service.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON BRAKE PADS Note: This light will illuminate when the brake pads have Always use genuine parts or similar because the reached their wear limit. Integrated Brake System (IBS) system could detect anomalies. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS — IF EQUIPPED Warning! This light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic brake It is recommended to use only OEM brake pads in order discs have reached their wear limit. to ensure the original performance of the braking system.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the dynamic drive control system.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer. Signals a windshield wiper failure.

83 Symbol What It Means What To Do

GENERIC INDICATION Signals information and failures. The accompanying messages describe the failure.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This telltale will illuminate to report a four wheel drive the failure eliminated. system failure.

AFS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked. directional light system failure.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable suspension setting is activated.

SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC) — IF EQUIPPED While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. in the suspension system.

To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL “Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with the The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low. in “Technical Specifications.” GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

84 Green Symbols

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

START/STOP OPERATION The telltale will illuminate in the case of Start/Stop system intervention (stopping the engine). When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start” in “Starting And Operating”).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

Blue Symbols

Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

85 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND SYSTEM Cybersecurity MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Operation Yourvehicle is required to have an In some localities, it may be a legal The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system) Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and requirement to pass an inspection of your carries out a continuous diagnosis of the a connection port to allow access to vehicle's emissions control system. components of the vehicle related to information related to the performance Failure to pass could prevent vehicle emissions. of your emissions controls. Authorized registration. service technicians may need to access For states that require It also alerts the driver of when these this information to assist with the components are no longer in peak an Inspection and diagnosis and service of your vehicle and Maintenance (I/M), this condition by switching on the warning emissions system. light on the instrument panel (see check verifies the “Warning Lights And Messages” “Malfunction Indicator paragraph in this chapter). Warning! Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the The aim of the OBD system (Onboard OBD II system is ready for testing. Diagnostic) is to: ONLYan authorized service technician Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. Monitor the efficiency of the system should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, The OBD II system may not be ready if Indicate an increase in emissions diagnose, or service your vehicle. your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery Indicate the need to replace damaged If unauthorized equipment is connected replacement. If the OBD II system should components to the OBD II connection port, such as a be determined not ready for the I/M test, driver-behavior tracking device, it may: The vehicle also has a connector, which your vehicle may fail the test. can interface with appropriate tools, that Be possible that vehicle systems, Yourvehicle has a simple ignition makes it possible to read the error codes including safety related systems, could be actuated test, which you can use prior to impaired or a loss of vehicle control could stored in the electronic control units occur that may result in an accident going to the test station. To check if your together with a series of specific involving serious injury or death. vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you parameters for engine operation and must do the following: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL diagnosis. This check can be carried out Access, or allow others to access, by your authorized dealer. information stored in your vehicle systems, 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON including personal information. position, but do not crank or start the Note: After eliminating a fault, to check engine. the system completely, your authorized dealer is obliged to run tests and, if Note: If you crank or start the engine, necessary certain road tests. you will have to start this test over.

86 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen: The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. 87 This page is intentionally left blank

88 SAFETY

This very important section describes ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ...... 90 the safety systems that your vehicle is AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ....93 equipped with, and provides instructions OCCUPANT RESTRAINT on how to use them correctly. SYSTEMS ...... 101 SAFETYTIPS ...... 126

89 ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS The system also improves control and The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws The vehicle may be equipped with the stability of the vehicle when braking on a of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor following active safety devices: surface where the grip of the left and can it increase braking or steering efficiency right wheels varies, such as in a corner. beyond that afforded by the condition of the Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System vehicle brakes and tires or the traction

SAFETY The Electronic Braking Force Distribution afforded. Drive Train Control (DTC) System (EBD) system works with the ABS, allowing the brake force to be distributed The ABS cannot prevent collisions, Electronic Stability Control (ESC) between the front and rear wheels. including those resulting from excessive System speed in turns, following another vehicle too System Intervention Traction Control System (TCS) closely, or hydroplaning. The ABS equipped on this vehicle is The capabilities of an ABS equipped Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System provided with the "Brake-by-wire" vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless Hill Start Assist (HSA) System (Integrated Brake System - IBS) function. or dangerous manner that could jeopardize With this system, the command given by the user’s safety or the safety of others. Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) pressing the brake pedal is not System transmitted hydraulically, but electrically. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active TorqueVectoring (ATV) System Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt on the pedal with the traditional system System For the operation of the systems, see the is no longer noticeable. The ESC system improves the directional following pages. control and stability of the vehicle in various driving conditions. Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System Warning! The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s An integral part of the braking system, understeer and oversteer, distributing the ABS prevents one or more wheels the brake force on the appropriate from locking and slipping in all road The ABS contains sophisticated wheels. The torque supplied by the surface conditions, regardless of the electronic equipment that may be engine can also be reduced in order to intensity of the braking action. The susceptible to interference caused by maintain control of the vehicle. system ensures that the vehicle can be improperly installed or high output radio controlled even during emergency transmitting equipment. This interference The ESC system uses sensors installed braking, allowing the driver to optimize can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking on the vehicle to determine the path that stopping distances. capability. Installation of such equipment the driver intends to follow and should be performed by qualified compares it with the vehicle’s effective The system intervenes during braking professionals. path. When the real path deviates from when the wheels are about to lock, the desired path, the ESC system typically in emergency braking or Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to intervenes to counter the vehicle’s low-grip conditions where locking may be a collision. Pumping makes the stopping understeer or oversteer. more frequent. distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. 90 Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is Vehicle modifications, or failure to System Intervention turning more than it should according to properly maintain your vehicle, may change The intervention of the system is the angle of the steering wheel. the handling characteristics of your vehicle, indicated by the flashing of the ESC and may negatively affect the performance warning light on the instrument panel, to Understeer occurs when the vehicle is of the ESC system. Changes to the steering inform the driver that the vehicle turning less than it should according to system, suspension, braking system, tire stability and grip are critical. the angle of the steering wheel. type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System System Intervention inflated and unevenly worn tires may also The PBA system is designed to improve degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle The intervention of the system is modification or poor vehicle maintenance the vehicle’s braking capacity during indicated by the flashing of the ESC that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC emergency braking. warning light on the instrument panel, to system can increase the risk of loss of The system detects emergency braking inform the driver that the vehicle vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal by monitoring the speed and force with stability and grip are critical. injury and death. which the brake pedal is pressed, and consequently applies the optimal brake Traction Control System (TCS) pressure. This can reduce the braking Warning! distance: the PBA system therefore The system automatically operates in the complements the ABS. event of slipping, loss of grip on wet Maximum assistance from the PBA Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on prevent the natural laws of physics from one or both drive wheels on roads that system is obtained by pressing the brake acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake traction afforded by prevailing road on the slipping conditions, two different pedal should be pressed continuously conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, control systems are activated: during braking, avoiding intermittent including those resulting from excessive presses, to get the most out of the speed in turns, driving on very slippery If the slipping involves both drive system. Do not reduce pressure on the surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot wheels, the system intervenes, reducing brake pedal until braking is no longer prevent accidents resulting from loss of the power transmitted by the engine. necessary. vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, If the slipping only involves one of the The PBA system is deactivated when the attentive, and skillful driver can prevent drive wheels, the Brake Limited brake pedal is released. accidents. The capabilities of an ESC Differential (BLD) function is activated, equipped vehicle must never be exploited in automatically braking the wheel which is a reckless or dangerous manner which could slipping (the behavior of a self-locking jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of differential is simulated). This will others. increase the engine torque transferred to the wheel which isn't slipping.

91 allowing your right foot to be moved system controls the steering through the easily from the brake pedal to the DST function to implement an additional Warning! accelerator. torque contribution on the steering wheel The system will automatically deactivate in order to suggest the most correct The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent maneuver to the driver.

SAFETY after two seconds without starting, the natural laws of physics from acting on gradually releasing the braking pressure. The coordinated action of the brakes and the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction During this release stage, it is possible to steering increases the sensation of afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA hear a typical mechanical brake release safety and control of the vehicle. cannot prevent collisions, including those noise, indicating the imminent movement resulting from excessive speed in turns, Note: The DST feature is only meant to driving on very slippery surfaces, or of the vehicle. help the driver realize the correct course hydroplaning. The capabilities of a of action through small torques on the PBA-equipped vehicle must never be steering wheel, which means the exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, Warning! effectiveness of the DST feature is highly which could jeopardize the user's safety or dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and the safety of others. overall reaction to the applied torque. It There may be situations where the Hill Start is very important to realize that this Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight Hill Start Assist (HSA) System rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or feature will not steer the vehicle, This is an integral part of the ESC system with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a meaning the driver is still responsible for and facilitates starting on slopes, trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active steering the vehicle. activating automatically in the following driving involvement. It is always the driver’s Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System cases: responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most The dynamic drive control is used to Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road importantly brake operation to ensure safe optimize and balance the drive torque with a gradient higher than 5%, engine operation of the vehicle under all road between the wheels of the same axles. running, brake pressed and transmission conditions. Yourcomplete attention is The ATVsystem improves the grip in in NEUTRAL (N) or gear other than always required while driving to maintain turns, sending more drive torque to the safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow external wheel. REVERSE (R) engaged. these warnings can result in a collision or Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road serious personal injury. Given that, in a turn, the external wheels with a gradient higher than 5%, engine of the car travel more than the internal ones and therefore turn faster, sending a running, brake pressed and reverse gear Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System engaged. higher thrust to the external rear wheel The DST function uses the integration of allows for the car to be more stable and When setting off, the ESC system control the ESC system with the electric power to not suffer an "understeer" condition. unit maintains the braking pressure on steering to increase the safety level of Understeer occurs when the vehicle is the wheels until the engine torque the whole vehicle. turning less than appropriate for the necessary for starting is reached, or in In critical situations (braking on surfaces steering wheel position. any case for a maximum of two seconds, with different grip conditions), the ESC 92 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS While driving, the system monitors the The following auxiliary driving systems detection area from three different are standard in this vehicle: points (side, rear and front) to check whether an alert needs to be sent to the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) driver. The system can detect the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) presence of a vehicle in one of these three areas. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Note: Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System The system does not alert the driver for the presence of fixed object (e.g. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system 06016S0002EM uses two radar sensors, located in the BSM Indicator Light safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). rear bumper (one for each side), to detect However, in some circumstances, the the presence of other vehicles in the rear When the engine is started the warning system may activate in the presence of side blind spots of your vehicle. light turns on to signal the driver that the these objects. This is normal and does system is active. not indicate a system malfunction. Sensors The system does not alert the driver The sensors are activated when any about the presence of vehicles coming forward gear is engaged at a speed from the opposite direction, in the higher than 6 mph (10 km/h) or when adjacent lanes. REVERSE is engaged. The sensors are temporarily deactivated when the vehicle is in PARK. Warning! The detection area of the system covers approximately one lane on both sides of The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an 06016S0001EM the vehicle. aid to help detect objects in the blind spot Rear Sensor Location This area begins from the door mirror and zones. The BSM system is not designed to The system warns the driver about the extends for 19 ft (6 m) towards the rear detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. presence of other vehicles in the part of the vehicle. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the detection area by illuminating the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s When the sensors are active, the system mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use warning light located within the door monitors the detection areas on both mirror on the side in which the other your turn signal before changing lanes. sides of the vehicle and warns the driver Failure to do so can result in serious injury or vehicle was detected. If equipped, an about the possible presence of vehicles death. audible chime will also be heard to alert in these areas. the driver (if option is selected within the Information and Entertainment System). 93 Rear View Note: Operating Mode The system detects vehicles coming from If the sensors are covered by objects The system may be activated/ the rear part of your vehicle on both sides or vehicles, the system will not warn the deactivated via the Information and and entering the rear detection area with driver. Entertainment System. To access the

SAFETY a difference in speed of less than 31 mph function, select the following items on (50 km/h) with relation to your vehicle. For the system to operate correctly, the main menu in sequence: the rear bumper area where the radar Overtaking Vehicles sensors are located must stay free from 1. “Settings.” If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, snow, ice and dirt gathered from the 2. “Safety.” with a difference in speed of less than road surface. 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle stays in 3. “Blind Spot Alert.” the blind spot for approximately Do not cover the rear bumper area 1.5 seconds, the warning light on the door where the radar sensors are located with "Blind Spot Alert” Visual Mode mirror of the corresponding side any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, When the system is enabled, the warning illuminates. etc.). light within the door mirror on the side of If the difference in speed between the the detected object illuminates. two vehicles is greater than 15 mph Warning! The visual warning on the mirror will blink (25 km/h), the warning light will not if the driver activates the turn signals, illuminate. indicating a lane change. Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a The warning will be fixed if the driver Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) back up aid system. It is intended to be used System to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in stays in the same lane. This system helps the driver during a parking lot situation. Drivers must be "Blind Spot Alert" Function reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced careful when backing up, even when using Deactivation visibility. RCP.Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check When the system is deactivated ("Blind The RCP system monitors the rear for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP detection areas on both sides of the obstructions, and blind spots before backing systems will not emit an acoustic or a vehicle to detect objects moving towards up. Failure to do so can result in serious visual warning. the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum injury or death. The BSM system will store the operating speed between 1 mph (1 km/h) and mode running when the engine was 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects moving at a stopped. Each time the engine is started, maximum speed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in the operating mode stored previously will areas such as parking lots. be recalled and used. The system activation is signaled to the driver by an acoustic warning.

94 General Information detected (limited braking). Signals and limited braking are intended to allow the The following regulatory statement driver time to intervene. applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) In situations with the risk of collision, if devices equipped in this vehicle: the system detects no intervention by This device complies with Part 15 of the the driver, it provides automatic braking FCC Rules and with Industry Canada to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the license-exempt RSS standard(s). potential front end collision (automatic Operation is subject to the following two braking). If intervention by the driver on conditions: the brake pedal is detected, but not 1. This device may not cause harmful 06016S0003EM deemed sufficient, the system may interference. Front Bumper Radar Location intervene in order to improve the reaction of the braking system by 2. This device must accept any reducing vehicle speed further interference received, including (additional assistance in braking stage). interference that may cause undesired The system will intervene automatically operation. in case of imminent collision or impact Note: Changes or modifications not against a pedestrian crossing the road expressly approved by the party (speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)). responsible for compliance could void the Note: For safety reasons, when the user’s authority to operate the vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers equipment. may remain blocked for about two Forward Collision Warning (FCW) seconds. Make sure to press the brake System pedal if the vehicle moves slightly 06016S0004EM forward. This is a driving assistance system which Windshield Camera Location uses a radar located behind the front In the event of an imminent collision, the bumper and a camera located in the Warning! central part of the windshield. system intervenes by automatically braking the vehicle to prevent the collision or reduce its effects. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not The system provides the driver with intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor audible and visual signals through can FCW detect every type of potential dedicated messages on the instrument collision. The driver has the responsibility to cluster display. avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this The system may lightly brake to warn the warning could lead to serious injury or death. driver if a potential front end collision is 95 Engagement/Disengagement Activation/Deactivation The default setting is "Med". With this The following functions can be selected The Forward Collision Warning system is setting, the system warns the driver of a in sequence using the Information and activated whenever the engine is started possible collision with the vehicle in front Entertainment System: regardless of what is shown on the when that vehicle is at a standard distance, between that of the other two

SAFETY Information and Entertainment System. 1. “Settings.” Following a deactivation, the system will settings. 2. “Safety.” not warn the driver about the possible With the system sensitivity set to "Far", collision with the preceding vehicle, the system will warn the driver of a 3. “Forward Collision Warning.” regardless of the setting selected with possible collision with the vehicle in front 4. “Mode.” the Information and Entertainment when that vehicle is at a greater distance, System. thus providing the possibility of acting on Select from among three operating the brakes more lightly and gradually. modes: Note: Each time the engine is started, the system is activated regardless of This setting provides the drivers with the Warning And Brake: the system (if what setting was selected when the maximum possible reaction time to active), in addition to the visual and engine was turned OFF. prevent a potential collision. audible warnings, provides limited The system is active: With the option set to "Near", the system braking, automatic braking, and will alert the driver of a possible collision additional assistance in braking stage Each time the engine is started. with the vehicle in front when that vehicle where the driver does not brake In the Information and Entertainment is close. This setting offers the driver a sufficiently in the event of a potential System. lower reaction time compared to the front end collision. "Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a When the ignition is in the ON position. potential collision, but permits more Only Warning: the system (if active), dynamic driving of the vehicle. does not provide limited braking, but The vehicle speed is between 4 mph guarantees automatic braking or (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). The system sensitivity setting is kept in additional assistance in braking stage the memory when the engine is turned When the front seat belts are OFF. where the driver does not brake at all or fastened. not sufficiently enough in the event of a System Limited Operation Signal potential front end collision. Changing The System Sensitivity If a dedicated message is displayed, a The sensitivity of the system can be condition limiting the system operation Disabled: the system does not provide changed through the Information and may have occurred. The possible reasons visual and audible warnings, limited Entertainment System menu, choosing of this limitation are if something is braking, automatic braking, or additional from one of the following three options: blocking the camera view, or a fault is assistance in braking stage. The system "Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the present. will therefore provide no indication of a description in the Information and possible collision. If an obstruction is signaled, clean the Entertainment System Supplement for area of the windshield. how to change the settings. 96 Although the vehicle can still be driven in In certain cases, this dedicated message Driving In Special Conditions normal conditions, the system may be not could be displayed when the radar is not In certain driving conditions, system completely available. detecting any vehicles or objects within intervention might be unexpected or When the conditions limiting the system its view range. delayed. The driver must therefore be very functions end, this will go back to normal If atmospheric conditions are not the careful, keeping control of the vehicle. and complete operation. Should the fault reason behind this message, check if the Driving close to a bend. persist, contact your authorized dealer. sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to The vehicle ahead is leaving a clean or remove any obstructions in the System Failure Signaling roundabout. If the system turns off and a dedicated area. Vehicles with small dimensions and/or message is shown on the display, it If the message appears frequently, even not aligned in the driving lane. means that there is a fault with the in the absence of atmospheric conditions system. such as snow, rain, mud or other Lane change by other vehicles. obstructions, contact your authorized In this case, it is still possible to drive the Vehicles traveling at right angles to the dealer for a sensor alignment check. vehicle, but you are advised to contact an vehicle. authorized dealer as soon as possible. In the absence of visible obstructions, Note: In particularly complex traffic Radar Indication Not Available manually removing the decorative cover trim and cleaning the radar surface could conditions, the driver can deactivate the If conditions are such that the radar be required. Have this operation system manually through the Information cannot detect obstacles correctly, the performed at your authorized dealer. and Entertainment System. system is deactivated and a dedicated Driving Close To A Bend message appears on the display. This Note: It is recommended that you do not When entering or leaving a wide bend, the generally occurs in the event of poor install devices, accessories, or system may detect a vehicle in front you, visibility, such as when it is snowing or aerodynamic attachments in front of the but not in the same driving lane. In cases raining heavily. sensor or darken it in any way, as this can compromise the correct functioning of such as these, the system may intervene. The function of this system can also be the system. temporarily reduced due to obstructions such as mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In Frontal Collision Alarm With Active such cases, a dedicated message will be Braking shown on the display and the system will If this function is selected, the brakes are be deactivated. This message can operated to reduce the speed of the sometimes appear in conditions of high vehicle in the event of potential collision. reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective This function applies an additional tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions braking pressure if the braking pressure limiting the system functions end, it will applied by the driver does not suffice to go back to normal and complete prevent potential collision. operation. The function is active with speed above 06016S0005EM 4 mph (7 km/h). Driving Around Wide Curves 97 The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A Roundabout On a roundabout, the system could intervene if it detects a vehicle ahead

SAFETY which is leaving the roundabout.

06016S0006EM 06016V0008EM Driving Near Small Vehicles Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar Range Lane Change By Other Vehicles Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter the same lane as your vehicle within the Warning! 06016S0010EM operating range of the radar sensor, may Driving In Roundabouts cause the system to intervene. Vehicles With Small Dimensions The system has not been designed to And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane prevent impacts and cannot detect possible conditions leading to an accident in The system cannot detect vehicles in advance. Failure to take into account this front of you but outside the range of the warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries. radar sensor and may therefore not react in the presence of small vehicles, such as The system may activate, assessing the trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of bicycles or motorcycles. reflecting metal objects different from other vehicles, such as safety barriers, road signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates, level crossings, gates, railways, objects near road constructions sites or higher than the 06016S0007EM vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the Other Vehicles Changing Lanes system may intervene inside multi-story Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To parking lots or tunnels, or due to a glare on The Vehicle the road surface. These possible activations are a consequence of the real driving The system may temporarily react to a scenario coverage by the system and must vehicle that is passing through the radar not be regarded as faults. sensor’s operating range at right angles. 98 The system has been designed for road Tire Pressure Monitoring System level. Therefore, if insufficient tire use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, (TPMS) pressure is indicated by the ( ) warning the system must be deactivated to avoid This vehicle is equipped with a Tire light displaying in the instrument cluster, unnecessary warnings. Automatic Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that increase the inflation pressure up to the deactivation is signaled by the dedicated sends the inflation pressure information prescribed cold inflation value. warning light/symbol switching on in the of each tire to the control unit, and will The system will automatically update, instrument panel (refer to the instructions in the "Warning Lights And Messages On The signal the driver in the event of and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your insufficient tire pressure. Light” will turn off once the system Instrument Panel" for further information). Tire pressure will vary with temperature receives the updated tire pressures. The by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every vehicle may need to be driven for up to 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in General Information outside temperature decreases, the tire order for the TPMS to receive this The following regulatory statement pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure information. applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) should always be set based on cold Operating Example inflation tire pressure. This is defined as devices equipped in this vehicle: For example, your vehicle may have a the tire pressure after the vehicle has not This device complies with Part 15 of the recommended cold (parked for more than been driven for at least three hours, or FCC Rules and with Industry Canada three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a license-exempt RSS standard(s). (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is three hour period. The cold tire inflation Operation is subject to the following two 68°F (20°C), and the measured tire pressure must not exceed the maximum conditions: pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a inflation pressure molded into the tire temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will 1. This device may not cause harmful sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing decrease the tire pressure to interference. And Maintenance” for information on approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. pressure is low enough to turn on the 2. This device must accept any The tire pressure will also increase as the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light.” interference received, including vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there Driving the vehicle may cause the tire interference that may cause undesired should be no adjustment for this pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi operation. increased pressure. (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Note: Changes or modifications not The TPMS will signal the driver if Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. expressly approved by the party pressure falls below the warning limit for In this situation, the “Tire Pressure responsible for compliance could void the any reason, including the effects of low Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off user’s authority to operate the temperature and normal loss of pressure only after the tires are inflated to the equipment. from the tire. vehicle’s recommended cold placard The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient pressure value. tire pressure when pressure is equal to or greater than the prescribed cold inflation 99 tire or tires with insufficient pressure After the punctured tire has been graphically, and an acoustic signal will be repaired with the original tire sealant Caution! emitted. contained in the Tire Repair Kit, the In this case, stop the vehicle, check the previous condition must be restored so that the warning light is off during

SAFETY The TPMS has been optimized for the inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS the necessary tire or tires to the correct normal driving. pressures and warning have been cold inflation pressure value, shown on TPMS Deactivation established for the tire size equipped on the display or in the dedicated TPMS The TPMS can be deactivated by your vehicle. Undesirable system operation menu. or sensor damage may result when using replacing all four wheel and tire replacement equipment that is not of the TPMS Temporarily Disabled — TPMS assemblies (road tires) with wheel and same size, type, and/or style. The TPM Check Message tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensor is not designed for use on When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Sensors, such as when installing winter aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will wheel and tire assemblies on your poor overall system performance or sensor vehicle. damage. Customers are encouraged to use flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature remain on solid. The system fault will also To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all operation. sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, four wheel and tire assemblies (road this sequence will repeat, provided that tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Using aftermarket tire sealants may the system fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes using an aftermarket tire sealant it is turn off when the fault condition no above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will recommended that you take your vehicle to longer exists. A system fault can occur chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash your authorized dealer to have your sensor due to any of the following: on and off for 75 seconds and then function checked. remain on. The instrument cluster will Jamming due to electronic devices or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” After inspecting or adjusting the tire driving next to facilities emitting the message and then display dashes (--) in pressure always reinstall the valve stem same radio frequencies as the TPMS place of the pressure values. cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from sensors. entering the valve stem, which could Beginning with the next ignition switch damage the TPMS sensor. Installing some form of aftermarket cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or window tinting that affects radio wave display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” signals. Insufficient Tire Pressure Indication message in the instrument cluster. Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of If an insufficient pressure value is Accumulation of snow or ice around the pressure values. detected on one or more tires, the the wheels or wheel housings. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four warning light in the instrument cluster Using tire chains on the vehicle. will display alongside the dedicated wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) messages, the system will highlight the Using wheels/tires not equipped with with tires equipped with TPM sensors. TPMS sensors. 100 Then, drive the vehicle for up to Seasonal temperature changes will OCCUPANT RESTRAINT 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will SYSTEMS TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" monitor the actual tire pressure in the will flash on and off for 75 seconds and tire. Some of the most important safety then turn off. The instrument cluster will features in your vehicle are the restraint display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” General Information systems: message and then display pressure The following regulatory statement Occupant Restraint Systems Features values in place of the dashes. On the next applies to all radio frequency (RF) ignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPM Seat Belt Systems devices equipped in this vehicle: SYSTEM" message will no longer be Supplemental Restraint Systems This device complies with Part 15 of the displayed, as long as no system fault (SRS) Air Bags exists. FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the Child Restraints Note: following two conditions: Some of the safety features described in (1) This device may not cause harmful The TPMS is not intended to replace this section may be standard equipment interference. normal tire care and maintenance, or to on some models, or may be optional provide warning of a tire failure or (2) This device must accept any equipment on others. If you are not sure, condition. interference received, including ask an authorized dealer. interference that may cause undesired The TPMS should not be used as a operation. Important Safety Precautions tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. Note: Changes or modifications not Please pay close attention to the expressly approved by the party information in this section. It tells you Driving on a significantly responsible for compliance could void the how to use your restraint system underinflated tire will cause the tire to user’s authority to operate the properly, to keep you and your overheat, and can lead to tire failure. equipment. passengers as safe as possible. Underinflation also reduces fuel Here are some simple steps you can take efficiency and tire tread life, and may to minimize the risk of harm from a affect the vehicle’s handling and deploying air bag: stopping ability. The TPMS is not a substitute for 1. Children 12 years old and under proper tire maintenance, and it is the should always ride buckled up in the rear driver’s responsibility to maintain seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”. 101 2. A child who is not big enough to wear 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to needs to be modified to accommodate a motor vehicle should be belted at all “Child Restraints” in this section for disabled person, refer to the “Customer times. further information) must be secured in Assistance” section for customer service the appropriate child restraint or contact information. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder SAFETY belt-positioning booster seat in a rear System (BeltAlert) seating position. Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (If 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in Warning! Equipped) a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in BeltAlert is a feature intended to the front passenger seat, move the seat Never place a rear-facing child restraint remind the driver and outboard front as far back as possible and use the in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger seat passenger (if equipped with proper child restraint (Refer to “Child front air bag can cause death or serious outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) Restraints” in this section for further injury to a child 12 years or younger, to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert information). including a child in a rear-facing child feature is active whenever the ignition restraint. switch is in the AVV/START or ON/RUN 4. Never allow children to slide the position. shoulder belt behind them or under their Never install a rear-facing child restraint arm. in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a Initial Indication rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If 5. Youshould read the instructions the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not If the driver is unbuckled when the provided with your child restraint to transport a rear-facing child restraint in ignition switch is first in the AVV/START make sure that you are using it properly. that vehicle. or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or 6. All occupants should always wear Seat Belt Systems outboard front seat passenger (if their lap and shoulder belts properly. equipped with outboard front passenger Buckle up even though you are an seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the 7. The driver and front passenger seats excellent driver, even on short trips. ignition switch is first in the AVV/START should be moved back as far as practical Someone on the road may be a poor or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt to allow the front air bags room to inflate. driver and could cause a collision that Reminder Light will turn on and remain on 8. Do not lean against the door or includes you. This can happen far away until both outboard front seat belts are window. If your vehicle has side air bags, from home or on your own street. buckled. The outboard front passenger and deployment occurs, the side air bags Research has shown that seat belts save seat BeltAlert is not active when an will inflate forcefully into the space lives, and they can reduce the outboard front passenger seat is between occupants and the door and seriousness of injuries in a collision. unoccupied. occupants could be injured. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking 102 BeltAlert Warning Sequence the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, The BeltAlert warning sequence is recommended that pets be restrained in inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, activated when the vehicle is moving the rear seat (if equipped) in pet people riding in these areas are more likely above a specified vehicle speed range harnesses or pet carriers that are to be seriously injured or killed. secured by seat belts, and cargo is and the driver or outboard front seat Do not allow people to ride in any area of passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with properly stowed. your vehicle that is not equipped with seats outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) Lap/Shoulder Belts and seat belts. (the outboard front passenger seat Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a BeltAlert is not active when the outboard All seating positions in your vehicle are seat and using a seat belt properly. front passenger seat is unoccupied). The equipped with lap/shoulder belts. Occupants, including the driver, should BeltAlert warning sequence starts by The seat belt webbing retractor will lock always wear their seat belts whether or not blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and only during very sudden stops or an air bag is also provided at their seating sounding an intermittent chime. Once the collisions. This feature allows the position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. BeltAlert warning sequence has shoulder part of the seat belt to move completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light freely with you under normal conditions. Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could will remain on until the seat belts are However, in a collision the seat belt will make your injuries in a collision much worse. buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence lock and reduce your risk of striking the Youmight suffer internal injuries, or you may repeat based on vehicle speed until inside of the vehicle or being thrown out could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt the driver and occupied outboard front of the vehicle. seat passenger seat belts are buckled. safely and to keep your passengers safe, The driver should instruct all occupants too. to buckle their seat belts. Warning! Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can Change of Status crash into one another in a collision, hurting If the driver or outboard front seat Relying on the air bags alone could lead to one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder passenger (if equipped with outboard more severe injuries in a collision. The air belt or a lap belt for more than one person, front passenger seat BeltAlert) bags work with your seat belt to restrain no matter what their size. unbuckles their seat belt while the you properly. In some collisions, the air bags vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat sequence will begin until the seat belts belt even though you have air bags. Warning! are buckled again. In a collision, you and your passengers can The outboard front passenger seat suffer much greater injuries if you are not BeltAlert is not active when the outboard properly buckled up. Youcan strike the A lap belt worn too high can increase the front passenger seat is unoccupied. interior of your vehicle or other passengers, risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt BeltAlert may be triggered when an or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic animal or other items are placed on the Always be sure you and others in your bones, but across your abdomen. Always vehicle are buckled up properly. outboard front passenger seat or when wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. 103 A twisted seat belt may not protect you A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart properly. In a collision, it could even cut into in a collision and leave you with no you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your protection. Inspect the seat belt system body, without twists. If you can’t straighten periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an loose parts. Damaged parts must be SAFETY authorized dealer immediately and have it replaced immediately. Do not disassemble fixed. or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong collision. buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest 06046S0001NA you. Instructions Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat Belt Buckle A seat belt that is too loose will not 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you Sit back and adjust the seat. 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug could move too far forward, increasing the and lies low across your hips, below your possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt snugly. back of the front seat, and next to your portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To arm in the rear seat (for vehicles A seat belt that is worn under your arm is loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the dangerous. Yourbody could strike the inside equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, latch plate and pull out the seat belt. seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as the seat belt in a collision. worn under the arm can cause internal far as necessary to allow the seat belt to injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder go around your lap. 5. Position the shoulder belt across the bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder and chest with minimal, if any shoulder so that your strongest bones will 3. When the seat belt is long enough to slack so that it is comfortable and not take the force in a collision. fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle resting on your neck. The retractor will until you hear a “click.” A shoulder belt placed behind you will not withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. protect you from injury during a collision. Youare more likely to hit your head in a 6. To release the seat belt, push the red collision if you do not wear your shoulder button on the buckle. The seat belt will belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to automatically retract to its stowed be used together. position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

104 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Second Row Center Seat Belt The second row center seat belt features Procedure Operating Instructions a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to Use the following procedure to untwist a detach from the lower anchor when the twisted lap/shoulder belt. seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out 1. Position the latch plate as close as of the way in the parcel tray for added possible to the anchor point. convenience to open up utilization of the 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) storage areas behind the front seats above the latch plate, grasp and twist the when the seat is not occupied. seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and a fold that begins immediately above the regular latch plate from its stowed latch plate. position in the right rear side trim panel. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the folded webbing. The folded webbing seat belt over the seat. must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the 4. When the seat belt is long enough to seat belt is no longer twisted. fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a “click.” 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your 06056S0002EM Second Row Seat Belts lap. 1 — Seat Belt 2—SeatBelt 6. When the seat belt is long enough to Buckle Latch Plate fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 3 — Mini Latch 4 — Mini Seat Belt Plate Buckle 5 — Mini Buckle Release

105 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug When reattaching the mini-latch plate and Seat Belt Pretensioner and lies low across your hips, below your mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow The front outboard seat belt system is portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To the preceding procedure to detach the equipped with pretensioning devices that loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the are designed to remove slack from the SAFETY the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate seat belt in the event of a collision. These risk of sliding under the seat belt in a and mini-buckle. devices may improve the performance of collision. the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. 8. Position the shoulder belt on your Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Pretensioners work for all size chest so that it is comfortable and not occupants, including those in child resting on your neck. The retractor will restraints. withdraw any slack in the seat belt. Note: These devices are not a substitute 9. To release the seat belt, push the red for proper seat belt placement by the button on the buckle. occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate The pretensioners are triggered by the from the mini-buckle for storage, insert Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). the regular latch plate into the black Like the air bags, the pretensioners are button on the top of the mini-buckle. The 0226075266 single use items. A deployed seat belt will automatically retract to its Pregnant Women And Seat Belts pretensioner or a deployed air bag must stowed position. If necessary, slide the be replaced immediately. latch plate down the webbing to allow the Seat belts must be worn by all occupants seat belt to retract fully. Insert the including pregnant women: the risk of Energy Management Feature mini-latch plate and regular latch plate injury in the event of an accident is into its stowed position. reduced for the mother and the unborn The front outboard seat belt system is child if they are wearing a seat belt. equipped with an Energy Management Position the lap belt snug and low below feature that may help further reduce the the abdomen and across the strong risk of injury in the event of a collision. Warning! bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt The seat belt system has a retractor across the chest and away from the neck. assembly that is designed to release If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are Never place the shoulder belt behind the webbing in a controlled manner. not properly connected when the seat belt is back or under the arm. used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.

106 Switchable Automatic Locking mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the Retractors (ALR) buckle until you hear a "click." seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder sound. This indicates the seat belt is now The seat belts in the passenger seating belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat in the Automatic Locking Mode. positions are equipped with a Switchable belt will still retract to remove any slack How To Disengage The Automatic Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode is used to secure a child restraint system. Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder For additional information, refer to installed in a seating position that has a “Installing Child Restraints Using The belt and allow it to retract completely to seat belt with this feature. Children disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child 12 years old and under should always be Restraints” section of this manual. The and activate the vehicle sensitive properly restrained in the rear seat of a (emergency) locking mode. figure below illustrates the locking vehicle with a rear seat. feature for each seating position. Warning! Warning!

The seat belt assembly must be replaced Never place a rear-facing child restraint in if the switchable Automatic Locking front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat front air bag can cause death or serious belt function is not working properly when injury to a child 12 years or younger, checked according to the procedures in the including a child in a rear-facing child Service Manual. restraint. Failure to replace the seat belt assembly 06086S0102NA ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Never install a rear-facing child restraint could increase the risk of injury in collisions. in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a Retractor rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not to restrain occupants who are wearing the If the passenger seating position is seat belt or children who are using booster equipped with an ALR and is being used transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. seats. The locked mode is only used to for normal usage, only pull the seat belt install rear-facing or forward-facing child webbing out far enough to comfortably restraints that have a harness for wrap around the occupant’s mid-section How To Engage The Automatic Locking restraining the child. so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR Mode is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the 1. Buckle the combination lap and webbing to retract completely in this shoulder belt. case and then carefully pull out only the 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull amount of webbing necessary to downward until the entire seat belt is comfortably wrap around the occupant’s extracted. 107 Supplemental Restraint Systems Air Bag Warning Light occurs, have an authorized dealer service (SRS) the air bag system immediately. Some of the safety features described in The Air Bag Warning Light does not this section may be standard equipment come on during the four to eight seconds

SAFETY on some models, or may be optional The ORC monitors the readiness of the when the ignition switch is first in the equipment on others. If you are not sure, electronic parts of the air bag system ON/RUN position. ask an authorized dealer. whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition The Air Bag Warning Light remains on The air bag system must be ready to after the four to eight-second interval. protect you in a collision. The Occupant switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the position, the air bag system is not on and The Air Bag Warning Light comes on internal circuits and interconnecting the air bags will not inflate. intermittently or remains on while wiring associated with the electrical Air The ORC contains a backup power supply driving. Bag System Components. Yourvehicle system that may deploy the air bag Note: If the speedometer, tachometer, may be equipped with the following Air system even if the battery loses power or or any engine related gauges are not Bag System Components: it becomes disconnected prior to working, the Occupant Restraint deployment. Air Bag System Components Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning this condition the air bags may not be Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Light in the instrument panel for ready to inflate for your protection. Have approximately four to eight seconds for a an authorized dealer service the air bag Air Bag Warning Light self-check when the ignition switch is system immediately. Steering Wheel and Column first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will Instrument Panel turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction Warning! Knee Impact Bolsters in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your momentarily or continuously. A single instrument panel could mean you won’t have Seat Belt Buckle Switch chime will sound to alert you if the light the air bag system to protect you in a comes on again after initial startup. collision. If the light does not come on as a Supplemental Side Air Bags The ORC also includes diagnostics that bulb check when the ignition is first turned Supplemental Knee Air Bags will illuminate the instrument panel Air on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is it comes on as you drive, have an authorized Front and Side Impact Sensors dealer service the air bag system detected that could affect the air bag immediately. Seat Belt Pretensioners system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air Seat Track Position Sensors bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following 108 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert 06106S0001EM 0502122443US you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Driver Air Bag Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations Light has come on and a fault has been 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags detected. If the Redundant Air Bag 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Warning Light comes on intermittently or Bolsters/Supplemental Knee Air Bags remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Warning! Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” section of this manual. Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag Front Air Bags deployment could cause serious injury, 06106S0002EM including death. Air bags need room to This vehicle has front air bags and Passenger Air Bag inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and your arms to reach the steering wheel or front passenger. The front air bags are a instrument panel. supplement to the seat belt restraint Never place a rear-facing child restraint systems. The driver front air bag is in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger mounted in the center of the steering front air bag can cause death or serious wheel. The passenger front air bag is injury to a child 12 years or younger, mounted in the instrument panel, above including a child in a rear-facing child the glove compartment. The words “SRS restraint. AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers. 109 Never install a rear-facing child restraint On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a Warning! rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If deploy in crashes with little vehicle the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not front-end damage but that produce a transport a rear-facing child restraint in No objects should be placed over or near severe initial deceleration. SAFETY that vehicle. the air bag on the instrument panel or Because air bag sensors measure vehicle steering wheel because any such objects deceleration over time, vehicle speed and Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag could cause harm if the vehicle is in a damage by themselves are not good collision severe enough to cause the air bag indicators of whether or not an air bag Features to inflate. should have deployed. The Advanced Front Air Bag system has Do not put anything on or around the air Seat belts are necessary for your multistage driver and front passenger air bag covers or attempt to open them protection in all collisions, and also are bags. This system provides output manually. Youmay damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags needed to help keep you in position, away appropriate to the severity and type of from an inflating air bag. collision as determined by the Occupant may no longer be functional. The protective Restraint Controller (ORC), which may covers for the air bag cushions are designed When the ORC detects a collision to open only when the air bags are inflating. receive information from the front requiring the front air bags, it signals the impact sensors (if equipped) or other Relying on the air bags alone could lead to inflator units. A large quantity of system components. more severe injuries in a collision. The air non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the bags work with your seat belt to restrain front air bags. The first stage inflator is triggered you properly. In some collisions, air bags immediately during an impact that The steering wheel hub trim cover and won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat the upper passenger side of the requires air bag deployment. A low belts even though you have air bags. energy output is used in less severe instrument panel separate and fold out of collisions. A higher energy output is used the way as the air bags inflate to their full for more severe collisions. Front Air Bag Operation size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The This vehicle may be equipped with a Front Air Bags are designed to provide front air bags then quickly deflate while driver and/or front passenger seat belt additional protection by supplementing helping to restrain the driver and front buckle switch that detects whether the the seat belts. Front air bags are not passenger. driver or front passenger seat belt is expected to reduce the risk of injury in buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front Knee Impact Bolsters adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced air bags will not deploy in all frontal Front Air Bags. collisions, including some that may The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front This vehicle may be equipped with driver produce substantial vehicle damage — passenger, and position the front and/or front passenger seat track for example, some pole collisions, occupants for improved interaction with position sensors that may adjust the underrides, and angle offset collisions. the front air bags. inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. 110 Warning!

Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver And Front 06096S0103NA 06106S0004EM Passenger Knee Air Bags Front Passenger Knee Air Bag Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Supplemental Side Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with a When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air on the outboard side of the seatback’s mounted in the instrument panel below Bags (SABs) trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys the steering column and a Supplemental This vehicle is equipped with through the seat seam into the space Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air between the occupant and the door. The instrument panel below the glove Bags (SABs). SAB moves at a very high speed and with compartment. The Supplemental Knee Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air such a high force that it could injure Air Bags provide enhanced protection Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard occupants if they are not seated during a frontal impact by working side of the front seats. The SABs are properly, or if items are positioned in the together with the seat belts, marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or area where the SAB inflates. Children are pretensioners, and front air bags. “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on at an even greater risk of injury from a the outboard side of the seats. deploying air bag. The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury Warning! reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

06096S0102NA Driver Knee Air Bag 111 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable and seated properly, or if items are impact sensors aid the ORC in Curtains (SABICs) positioned in the area where the SABICs determining the appropriate response to This vehicle is equipped with inflate. Children are at an even greater impact events. The system is calibrated Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable risk of injury from a deploying air bag. to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that

SAFETY Curtains (SABICs). The SABICs may help reduce the risk of Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable partial or complete ejection of vehicle require Side Air Bag occupant protection. Curtains (SABICs) are located above the occupants through side windows in In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy side windows. The trim covering the certain side impact events. independently; a left side impact deploys SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or the left Side Air Bags only and a “AIRBAG.” right-side impact deploys the right Side Warning! Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. Do not mount equipment, or stack The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all luggage or other cargo up high enough to side collisions, including some collisions block the deployment of the SABICs. The at certain angles, or some side collisions trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are that do not impact the area of the located should remain free from any passenger compartment. The Side Air obstructions. Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags In order for the SABICs to work as deploy. intended, do not install any accessory items 06106S0005EM in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do Side Air Bags are a supplement to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable not add an aftermarket sunroof to your seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags Curtain (SABIC) Location vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require deploy in less time than it takes to blink SABICs may help reduce the risk of head permanent attachments (bolts or screws) your eyes. for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not and other injuries to front and rear seat drill into the roof of the vehicle for any outboard occupants in certain side reason. impacts, in addition to the injury Warning! reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. Side Impacts Occupants, including children, who are up The SABIC deploys downward, covering The Side Air Bags are designed to against or very close to Side Air Bags can be the side windows. An inflating SABIC activate in certain side impacts. The seriously injured or killed. Occupants, pushes the outside edge of the headliner Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) including children, should never lean on or out of the way and covers the window. determines whether the deployment of sleep against the door, side windows, or The SABICs inflate with enough force to the Side Air Bags in a particular impact area where the side air bags inflate, even if injure occupants if they are not belted event is appropriate, based on the they are in an infant or child restraint. severity and type of collision. The side 112 Seat belts (and child restraints where event is appropriate, based on the Seat Belt Buckle Switch severity and type of collision. Vehicle appropriate) are necessary for your Supplemental Side Air Bags protection in all collisions. They also help damage by itself is not a good indicator keep you in position, away from an inflating of whether or not Side Air Bags should Supplemental Knee Air Bags Side Air Bag. To get the best protection have deployed. Front and Side Impact Sensors from the Side Air Bags, occupants must The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all wear their seat belts properly and sit rollover events. The rollover sensing Seat Belt Pretensioners upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a system determines if a rollover event Seat Track Position Sensors child restraint or booster seat that is may be in progress and whether appropriate for the size of the child. deployment is appropriate. In the event If A Deployment Occurs the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the The front air bags are designed to deflate Warning! Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover immediately after deployment. sensing system will also deploy the seat Note: Front and/or side air bags will not belt pretensioners on both sides of the deploy in all collisions. This does not Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not vehicle. mean something is wrong with the air bag lean against the door or window. Sit upright system. in the center of the seat. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle If you do have a collision which deploys Being too close to the Side Air Bags occupants through side windows in the air bags, any or all of the following during deployment could cause you to be certain rollover or side impact events. may occur: severely injured or killed. The air bag material may sometimes Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could Air Bag System Components cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to lead to more severe injuries in a collision. Note: The Occupant Restraint Controller the occupants as the air bags deploy and The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and unfold. The abrasions are similar to to restrain you properly. In some collisions, interconnecting wiring associated with friction rope burns or those you might get Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always electrical Air Bag System Components wear your seat belt even though you have sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. listed below: Side Air Bags. They are not caused by contact with Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you Note: Air bag covers may not be obvious Air Bag Warning Light in the interior trim, but they will open haven’t healed significantly within a few during air bag deployment. Steering Wheel and Column days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. Rollover Events Instrument Panel As the air bags deflate, you may see Side Air Bags are designed to activate in Knee Impact Bolsters certain rollover events. The ORC some smoke-like particles. The particles determines whether the deployment of Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags are a normal by-product of the process the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover that generates the non-toxic gas used for 113 air bag inflation. These airborne particles Enhanced Accident Response Cut off battery power to the: may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or System –Engine throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose In the event of an impact, if the –Electric Motor (if equipped) or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If communication network remains intact, SAFETY –Electric power steering the irritation continues, see your doctor. and the power remains intact, depending If these particles settle on your clothing, on the nature of the event, the ORC will –Brake booster follow the garment manufacturer’s determine whether to have the Enhanced –Electric park brake instructions for cleaning. Accident Response System perform the following functions: Do not drive your vehicle after the air –Automatic transmission gear bags have deployed. If you are involved in Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped) selector another collision, the air bags will not be Cut off battery power to the electric –Horn in place to protect you. motor (If Equipped) –Front wiper Flash hazard lights as long as the Warning! –Headlamp washer pump battery has power Note: After an accident, remember to Turn on the interior lights, which cycle the ignition to the STOP Deployed air bags and seat belt remain on as long as the battery has (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key pretensioners cannot protect you in another power or for 15 minutes from the from the ignition switch to avoid draining collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor intervention of the Enhanced Accident the battery. Carefully check the vehicle assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer Response System. for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine immediately. Also, have the Occupant Unlock the power door locks. Restraint Controller System serviced as compartment and fuel tank before well. Yourvehicle may also be designed to resetting the system and starting the perform any of these other functions in engine. If there are no fuel leaks or response to the Enhanced Accident Note: damage to the vehicle electrical devices Response System: (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset Air bag covers may not be obvious in Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the system by following the procedure the interior trim, but they will open the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC described below. If you have any doubt, during air bag deployment. Circulation Door contact an authorized dealer. After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

114 Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.

Customer Will See Customer Action Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds 1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). Right turn light BLINKS. 2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. 4. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light BLINKS. 5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. Right turn light BLINKS. 6. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 7. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. 8. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 9. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. 10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed Right turn light is OFF. in Neutral State). Left turn light is OFF. 115 Customer Will See Customer Action Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds

SAFETY 11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. 12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be System is now reset and the engine may be started. completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated). Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually). If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System Do not attempt to modify any part of your performed. The EDR is designed to air bag system. The air bag may inflate record data related to vehicle dynamics accidentally or may not function properly if and safety systems for a short period of Warning! modifications are made. Take your vehicle time, typically 30 seconds or less. The to an authorized dealer for any air bag EDR in this vehicle is designed to record system service. If your seat, including your such data as: Modifications to any part of the air bag trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced system could cause it to fail when you need in any way (including removal or How various systems in your vehicle it. Youcould be injured if the air bag system loosening/tightening of seat attachment were operating; is not there to protect you. Do not modify bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat Whether or not the driver and the components or wiring, including adding passenger safety belts were any kind of badges or stickers to the accessories may be used. If it is necessary steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper to modify the air bag system for persons buckled/fastened; passenger side of the instrument panel. Do with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer. How far (if at all) the driver was not modify the front bumper, vehicle body depressing the accelerator and/or brake structure, or add aftermarket side steps or pedal; and, running boards. Event Data Recorder (EDR) It is dangerous to try to repair any part of How fast the vehicle was traveling. the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell This vehicle is equipped with an event These data can help provide a better anyone who works on your vehicle that it data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of understanding of the circumstances in has an air bag system. an EDR is to record, in certain crash or which crashes and injuries occur. near crash-like situations, such as an air Note: EDR data are recorded by your bag deployment or hitting a road vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation obstacle, data that will assist in occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR understanding how a vehicle’s systems under normal driving conditions and no 116 personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, Note: and crash location) are recorded. Warning! For additional information, However, other parties, such as law refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/ enforcement, could combine the EDR parents-and-caregivers data with the type of personally In a collision, an unrestrained child can or call: 1–888–327–4236 identifying data routinely acquired during become a projectile inside the vehicle. The a crash investigation. force required to hold even an infant on your Canadian residents should refer to To read data recorded by an EDR, special lap could become so great that you could not Transport Canada’s website for equipment is required, and access to the hold the child, no matter how strong you are. additional information: http:// The child and others could be badly injured or vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/ killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm to the vehicle manufacturer, other be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the There are different sizes and types of vehicle or the EDR. restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an Child Restraints adult safety belt. Always check the child Everyone in your vehicle needs to be seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you buckled up at all times, including babies have the correct seat for your child. and children. Every state in the United Carefully read and follow all the States, and every Canadian province, instructions and warnings in the child requires that small children ride in proper restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the restraint systems. This is the law, and you labels attached to the child restraint. can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Before buying any restraint system, Children 12 years or younger should ride make sure that it has a label certifying properly buckled up in a rear seat, if that it meets all applicable Safety available. According to crash statistics, Standards. Youshould also make sure children are safer when properly that you can install it in the vehicle where restrained in the rear seats rather than in you will use it. the front.

117 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

SAFETY Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Child Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the limits of their child restraint vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a Small Children have outgrown the height or weight limit of five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicle Children who have outgrown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle Larger Children forward-facing child restraint, but are too seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their vehicle booster seat

Infant And Child Restraints rear-facing direction than infant carriers Never install a rear-facing child restraint do, so they can be used rear-facing by in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a Safety experts recommend that children children who have outgrown their infant rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they carrier but are still less than at least two the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not are two years old or until they reach years old. Children should remain transport a rear-facing child restraint in either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing until they reach the highest that vehicle. rear-facing child restraint. Two types of weight or height allowed by their child restraints can be used rear-facing: convertible child seat. infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing Warning! in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in Convertible child seats can be used either front of an air bag. A deploying passenger rear-facing or forward-facing in the front air bag can cause death or serious vehicle. Convertible child seats often injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child have a higher weight limit in the restraint. 118 Older Children And Child Restraints After a child restraint is installed in the 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat possible, touching the child’s thighs and Children who are two years old or who forward or rearward because it can loosen not the stomach? have outgrown their rear-facing the child restraint attachments. Remove the convertible child seat can ride child restraint before adjusting the vehicle 5. Can the child stay seated like this for forward-facing in the vehicle. seat position. When the vehicle seat has the whole trip? Forward-facing child seats and been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. If the answer to any of these questions convertible child seats used in the When your child restraint is not in use, was “no,” then the child still needs to use a forward-facing direction are for children secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is who are over two years old or who have LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat outgrown the rear-facing weight or vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In belt fit periodically and make sure the height limit of their rear-facing a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s convertible child seat. Children should occupants or seatbacks and cause serious squirming or slouching can move the belt remain in a forward-facing child seat with personal injury. out of position. If the shoulder belt a harness for as long as possible, up to contacts the face or neck, move the child the highest weight or height allowed by Children Too Large For Booster closer to the center of the vehicle, or use the child seat. Seats a booster seat to position the seat belt All children whose weight or height is on the child correctly. above the forward-facing limit for the Children who are large enough to wear child seat should use a belt-positioning the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts legs are long enough to bend over the Warning! fit properly. If the child cannot sit with front of the seat when their back is knees bent over the vehicle’s seat against the seatback, should use the seat Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt cushion while the child’s back is against belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the seatback, they should use a test to decide whether the child can use the shoulder belt will not protect a child belt-positioning booster seat. The child the vehicle’s seat belt alone: properly, which may result in serious injury or and belt-positioning booster seat are death. A child must always wear both the lap held in the vehicle by the seat belt. 1. Can the child sit all the way back and shoulder portions of the seat belt against the back of the vehicle seat? correctly.

Warning! 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way back? Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the loose in a collision. The child could be badly child’s shoulder between the neck and injured or killed. Follow the child restraint arm? manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 119 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Combined Weight

SAFETY LATCH – Lower Restraint Type of the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Restraint Anchors Only Tether Anchor Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg)

Lower Anchors And Tethers For located at the back of the seat cushion LATCH Positions For Installing Child CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System where it meets the seatback and one top Restraints In This Vehicle tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top 022668173 tether anchorage to install the child LATCH Label restraint. Please see the following table Yourvehicle is equipped with the child for more information. 06086S0101NA restraint anchorage system called LATCH Positions LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors Lower Anchorage Symbol and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) system has three vehicle anchor points TopTether Anchorage Symbol for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages 120 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system 65 lbs (29.5 kg) (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of to attach the child restraint? the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used forward-facing child restraint. together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Can a child seat be installed in the center position using Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat No the inner LATCH lower anchorage? in the center seating position. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have Can two child restraints be attached using a common dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to No lower LATCH anchorage? install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also Yes front passenger seat? allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. The head restraints can be removed in every seating position if they interfere with the installation of the child Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes restraint. Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further information.

121 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Forward-facing child restraints and some Anchorages rear-facing child restraints will also be The lower anchorages equipped with a tether strap. The tether are round bars that are There are tether strap strap will have a hook at the end to attach found at the rear of the anchorages behind each to the top tether anchorage and a way to SAFETY seat cushion where it rear seating position tighten the strap after it is attached to meets the seatback. located in the panel the anchorage. Each anchorage is between the rear under a cover with the seatback and the rear Center Seat LATCH anchorage symbol on it. window. They are found Lift the cover to access the lower under a plastic cover Warning! anchorage. with the tether anchorage symbol on it.

Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. Youmust use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible

06086S0009EM 06086S0104NA Child Restraint System” for typical LATCH Anchorage Locations Upper Tether Anchorage Location installation instructions. 1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar LATCH-compatible child restraint 2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations systems will be equipped with a rigid bar Always follow the directions of the or a flexible strap on each side. Each will child restraint manufacturer when have a hook or connector to attach to the installing your child restraint. Not all lower anchorage and a way to tighten the child restraint systems will be installed connection to the anchorage. as described here.

122 To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 4. If the child restraint has a tether Before installing a child restraint using Restraint strap, connect it to the top tether the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt anchorage. See the section “Installing behind the child restraint and out of the If the selected seating position has a Child Restraints Using the TopTether child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Anchorage” for directions to attach a interferes with the child restraint (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, tether anchor. installation, instead of buckling it behind following the instructions below. See the the child restraint, route the seat belt section “Installing Child Restraints Using 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push through the child restraint belt path and the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type the child restraint rearward and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. of seat belt each seating position has. downward into the seat. Remove slack in Remind all children in the vehicle that the the straps according to the child restraint seat belts are not toys and that they 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower manufacturer’s instructions. should not play with them. straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach 6. Test that the child restraint is the hooks or connectors to the vehicle installed tightly by pulling back and forth anchorages. on the child seat at the belt path. It should Warning! not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in 2. Place the child seat between the any direction. lower anchorages for that seating Improper installation of a child restraint position. For some second row seats, you How To Stow An Unused to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly may need to recline the seat and / or raise Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt: injured or killed. Follow the child restraint the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a manufacturer’s directions exactly when better fit. If the rear seat can be moved When using the LATCH attaching system installing an infant or child restraint. forward and rearward in the vehicle, you to install a child restraint, stow all ALR may wish to move it to its rear-most seat belts that are not being used by Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by position to make room for the child seat. other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no Youmay also move the front seat circumstances are they to be used for adult forward to allow more room for the child injure a child if they play with it and seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other seat. accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. items or equipment to the vehicle. 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

123 Installing Child Restraints Using The seat belts in the passenger seating Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For The Vehicle Seat Belt positions are equipped with a Switchable Installing Child Restraints In This Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that Vehicle Child restraint systems are designed to is designed to keep the lap portion of the be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or seat belt tight around the child restraint SAFETY the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the Warning! webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make Improper installation or failure to a clicking noise while the webbing is properly secure a child restraint can lead to pulled back into the retractor. failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” 06086S0102NA description in “Switchable Automatic Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s Locking Retractors (ALR)” under Locations directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. “Occupant Restraint Systems” for ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking additional information on ALR. Retractor Please see the table below and the following sections for more information. TopTether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the Weight limit of Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the the Child forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Restraint the child restraint. Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is Yes the front passenger seat? allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. The head restraints can be removed in every seating position if they Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes interfere with the installation of the child restraint. Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further information. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR No belt against the belt path of the child restraint? retractor. 124 Installing A Child Restraint With A 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle Any seat belt system will loosen with Switchable Automatic Locking until you hear a “click.” time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Retractor (ALR): 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. Child restraint systems are designed to Installing Child Restraints Using be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the The Top Tether Anchorage: the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the Warning! retractor. Then, allow the webbing to Warning! retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking Do not attach a tether strap for a sound. This means the seat belt is now in rear-facing car seat to any location in front Improper installation or failure to the Automatic Locking mode. of the car seat, including the seat frame or a properly secure a child restraint can lead to tether anchorage. Only attach the tether failure of the restraint. The child could be 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether badly injured or killed. retractor. If it is locked, you should not be anchorage that is approved for that seating Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s able to pull out any webbing. If the position, located behind the top of the directions exactly when installing an infant retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors or child restraint. and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing System” for the location of approved tether to tighten the lap portion around the child anchorages in your vehicle. 1. Place the child seat in the center of restraint while you push the child the seating position. For some second restraint rearward and downward into row seats, you may need to recline the the vehicle seat. seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear 8. If the child restraint has a top tether seat can be moved forward and rearward strap and the seating position has a top in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to tether anchorage, connect the tether its rear-most position to make room for strap to the anchorage and tighten the the child seat. Youmay also move the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the TopTether 1. Look behind the seating position front seat forward to allow more room where you plan to install the child for the child seat. Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. restraint to find the tether anchorage. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing Youmay need to move the seat forward from the retractor to pass it through the 9. Test that the child restraint is to provide better access to the tether belt path of the child restraint. Do not installed tightly by pulling back and forth anchorage. If there is no top tether twist the belt webbing in the belt path. on the child seat at the belt path. It should anchorage for that seating position, not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in move the child restraint to another any direction. position in the vehicle if one is available. 125 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the 5. Remove slack in the tether strap SAFETY TIPS anchor directly behind the seat where according to the child restraint you are placing the child restraint. manufacturer’s instructions. Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. SAFETY Warning!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap Warning! could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child Do not leave children or animals inside seat to secure a child restraint top tether parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat strap. build-up may cause serious injury or death. If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear It is extremely dangerous to ride in a 0502143370US seat, make sure the tether strap does not cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In Upper Tether Anchorage Location slip into the opening between the seatbacks a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. 1 — Tether Strap Hook as you remove slack in the strap. 2 — Cover Do not allow people to ride in any area of 3 — Tether Anchor Transporting Pets your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a 3. Route the tether strap to provide the harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be seat and using a seat belt properly. most direct path for the strap between thrown about and possibly injured, or the anchor and the child seat. If your injure a passenger during panic braking or vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear in a collision. Exhaust Gas head restraints, raise the head restraint, Pets should be restrained in the rear seat and where possible, route the tether (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet strap under the head restraint and carriers that are secured by seat belts. Warning! between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain tether strap around the outboard side of carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and the head restraint. odorless. Breathing it can make you 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: child restraint to the top tether Do not run the engine in a closed garage anchorage as shown in the diagram. or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. 126 If you are required to drive with the Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside Defroster trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure The Vehicle that all windows are closed and the climate Check operation by selecting the defrost control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. Seat Belts mode and place the blower control on DO NOT use the recirculation mode. high speed. Youshould be able to feel the Inspect the seat belt system periodically, air directed against the windshield. See If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. an authorized dealer for service if your with the engine running, adjust your heating Damaged parts must be replaced defroster is inoperable. or cooling controls to force outside air into immediately. Do not disassemble or the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. modify the system. Floor Mat Safety Information Front seat belt assemblies must be Always use floor mats designed to fit The best protection against carbon replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a assemblies must be replaced after a does not interfere with the operation of properly maintained engine exhaust collision if they have been damaged (i.e., the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. system. bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there Only use a floor mat that is securely is any question regarding seat belt or Whenever a change is noticed in the attached using the floor mat fasteners so retractor condition, replace the seat belt. sound of the exhaust system, when it cannot slip out of position and interfere exhaust fumes can be detected inside the Air Bag Warning Light with the accelerator, brake or clutch vehicle, or when the underside or rear of pedals or impair safe operation of your the vehicle is damaged, have a competent The Air Bag warning light will turn on vehicle in other ways. mechanic inspect the complete exhaust for four to eight seconds as a bulb check system and adjacent body areas for when the ignition switch is first turned to broken, damaged, deteriorated, or ON/RUN. If the light is either not on Warning! mispositioned parts. Open seams or during starting, stays on, or turns on while loose connections could permit exhaust driving, have the system inspected at an fumes to seep into the passenger authorized dealer as soon as possible. An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or compartment. In addition, inspect the After the bulb check, this light will stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat exhaust system each time the vehicle is illuminate with a single chime when a fasteners may cause your floor mat to raised for lubrication or oil change. fault with the Air Bag System has been interfere with the accelerator, brake, or Replace as required. detected. It will stay on until the fault is clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or removed. If the light comes on DEATH: intermittently or remains on while ALWAYS securely attach your floor driving, have an authorized dealer service mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT the vehicle immediately. install your floor mat upside down or turn Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm “Safety” for further information. mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. 127 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR If the vehicle carpet has been removed Door Latches MATFROM THE VEHICLE before and re-installed, always properly attach installing any other floor mat. NEVER install carpet to the floor and check the floor mat Check for proper closing, latching, and or stack an additional floor mat on top of an fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. locking. existing floor mat. Fully depress each pedal to check for SAFETY interference with the accelerator, brake, or Fluid Leaks ONLYinstall floor mats designed to fit clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that Check area under the vehicle after cannot be properly attached and secured to It is recommended to only use mild soap overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be and water to clean your floor mats. After other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat cleaning, always check your floor mat has are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid for the specific make, model, and year of been properly installed and is secured to leaks are suspected. The cause should be your vehicle. your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners located and corrected immediately. by lightly pulling mat. ONLYuse the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly Periodic Safety Checks YouShould parked with the engine off, fully depress the Make Outside The Vehicle accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your Tires floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, Examine tires for excessive tread wear remove the floor mat from the vehicle and and uneven wear patterns. Check for place the floor mat in your trunk. stones, nails, glass, or other objects ONLYuse the passenger’s side floor mat lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect on the passenger’s side floor area. the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver’s side floor area when Check the wheel nuts for tightness. the vehicle is moving. Objects can become Check the tires (including spare) for trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch proper cold inflation pressure. pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control. Lights NEVER place any objects under the floor Have someone observe the operation of mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects brake lights and exterior lights while you could change the position of the floor mat work the controls. Check turn signal and and may cause interference with the high beam indicator lights on the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. instrument panel.

128 STARTING AND OPERATING

Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, and STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 130 see how you can explore its fullest ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ...... 133 potential. We’ll look at how to drive AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION.....135 safely in any situation, making it a ALFA DNA PRO SELECTOR ...... 140 welcome companion with our comfort ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION and wallets in mind. (AAS)...... 143 STOP/START SYSTEM ...... 144 SPEED LIMITER ...... 146 SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE CONTROL) ...... 147 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 149 PARK SENSOR SYSTEM ...... 156 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 158 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES . .161 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 162 VEHICLE LOADING ...... 164 TRAILER TOWING ...... 165 SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING.....165

129 STARTING THE ENGINE Starting Procedure If the vehicle has a discharged battery, Before starting the engine, be sure to Proceed as follows: booster cables may be used to obtain a adjust the seat, the interior rear view start from a booster battery or the battery mirrors, and the door mirrors, and fasten 1. Apply the electric park brake and set in another vehicle. This type of start can be the seat belt correctly. the gear selector to PARK (P) or dangerous if done improperly. Refer to NEUTRAL (N). “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” Never press the accelerator pedal before for further information. starting the engine. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal without If necessary, messages indicating the touching the accelerator. starting procedure can be shown in the Caution! display. 3. Briefly push the ignition button. 4. If the engine doesn't start within a few seconds, you need to repeat the To prevent damage to the starter, do not Warning! continuously crank the engine for more than procedure. 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds If the problem persists, contact an before trying again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove authorized dealer. the key fob from the vehicle and lock your STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle. Remote Starting System This system uses the key fob to start the Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Warning! with access to an unlocked vehicle. engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid The system has a range of at least reasons. A child or others could be seriously into the throttle body air inlet opening in an 300 feet (91 meters). or fatally injured. Children should be warned attempt to start the vehicle. This could The remote starting system also not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal result in flash fire causing serious personal activates the climate control (if or the transmission gear selector. injury. equipped), the heated seats (if equipped), Do not leave the key fob in or near the Do not attempt to push or tow your and the heated steering wheel (if vehicle, or in a location accessible to vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped equipped), depending on temperatures children. A child could operate power with an automatic transmission cannot be outside and inside of the vehicle. windows, other controls, or move the started this way. Unburned fuel could enter vehicle. the catalytic converter and once the engine Note: has started, ignite and damage the Do not leave children or animals inside converter and vehicle. Obstructions between the vehicle parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat and key fob may reduce this range. build-up may cause serious injury or death.

130 How to use Remote Start Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer If Engine Fails To Start Activation — If Equipped All of the following conditions must be Starting the Engine with Key Fob met before the engine will remote start: When remote start is active and the Battery Run Down or Drained outside ambient temperature is less than Gear selector in PARK (P). If the ignition does not respond when the 39°F (4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer button is pushed, the key fob battery Doors closed. will be enabled. Exiting remote start will might be run down or drained. Therefore, resume previous operation, except if the Hood closed. the system does not detect the presence Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. of the key fob in the vehicle, and will Trunk closed. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and display a dedicated message. operation will continue. Hazard switch off. In this case, follow the instructions Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not Extended Park Starting outlined in "Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery" in the "Getting To Know pressed). If the vehicle has not been started or YourVehicle" chapter, and start the driven for at least 35 days, it is advisable Battery at an acceptable charge level. engine normally. to follow the indications below. PANIC button not pushed. To start the engine, proceed as follows: System not disabled from previous Warning! 1. Briefly push the ignition button remote start event. Vehicle alarm system indicator 2. If the engine does not start, wait five Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid flashing. seconds and let the starter cool down and into the throttle body air inlet opening in an then repeat the starting procedure attempt to start the vehicle. This could Ignition in the OFF mode. result in flash fire causing serious personal 3. If the engine does not start after eight injury. Fuel level meets minimum attempts, let the starter cool down for at requirement. least 10 seconds, and then repeat the Do not attempt to push or tow your starting procedure vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped Remote Start Comfort Systems — If with an automatic transmission cannot be Equipped If the problem persists, contact your started this way. Unburned fuel could enter When Remote Start is activated, the authorized dealer. the catalytic converter and once the engine Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity, has started, ignite and damage the heated steering wheel and driver heated converter and vehicle. seat features will automatically turn on in very difficult starting, that can be noticed cold weather. through rapid fatigue of the starter, If the vehicle has a discharged battery, might also be due to a discharged booster cables may be used to obtain a These features will stay on through the start from a booster battery or the battery duration of remote start also until the battery. In this case, see the "Jump Starting" section in the "In Case Of in another vehicle. This type of start can be ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode. dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Emergency" chapter. “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. 131 2. Engage the PARK (P) mode. After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the temperature inside the engine Caution! 3. With engine idling, push the compartment to cool before shutting off START/STOP button on the steering the engine. wheel to STOP the engine. To prevent damage to the starter, do not Cool Down continuously crank the engine for more than Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds mode when the engine is off. It is recommended before switching the before trying again. To shut off the engine with vehicle speed vehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must few minutes so that the turbocharger can After Starting — Warming Up The push and hold the ignition or push the be suitably lubricated. This procedure is Engine START/STOP button three times particularly recommended after severe consecutively within a few seconds. The driving. Proceed as follows: engine will shut down, and the ignition will After a full load operation, keep the Travel slowly, letting the engine run at be placed in the ON mode engine idling for three to five minutes a reduced RPM, without accelerating With the keyless ignition system, it is before switching it off. suddenly. possible to go away from the vehicle This time allows the lubricating oil and STARTING AND OPERATING It is recommended to wait until the taking the key fob with you, without the the engine coolant to eliminate the digital engine coolant temperature engine switching off. The vehicle will excessive heat from combustion indicator starts to rise for maximum inform about the absence of the key on chamber, bearings, inner components and performance. board, only if the doors are closed. turbocharger. Stopping the engine (cycling from the ON Stopping The Engine to the STOP position) the accessories are still powered for about three minutes, or To stop the engine, proceed as follows: until a door is opened. 1. Park the vehicle in a position that is When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF not dangerous for oncoming traffic. mode, the window switches remain active for three minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this function.

132 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE Note: Normally, the electric parking brake is engaged automatically when the The vehicle is equipped with electric park Caution! brake to guarantee better use and engine is stopped. This function can be optimal performance compared to a deactivated/activated on the manually operated park brake. Information and Entertainment system With the Electronic Parking Brake failure by selecting the following items in The electric parking brake features a warning light on, some functions of the sequence on the main menu: "Settings", electric parking brake are deactivated. In switch located on the center console, a "Driver Assistance" and "Automatic this case the driver is responsible for brake motor with caliper for each rear wheel, Parking Brake". activation and vehicle parking in complete and an electronic control module. safety conditions. In addition to engaging the electric park brake, along with steering and positioning chocks in front of the wheels (when on a If, under exceptional circumstances, the steep slope), you must always place the use of the brake is required with the vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the leaving. center console pulled as long as the brake Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the action is necessary. battery must be replaced in order to The BRAKE warning light may turn on unlock the electric park brake. with the hydraulic system temporarily unavailable, in this case braking is Engaging The Park Brake Manually controlled by the motors. Briefly pull the switch located on the 07046S0001EM The brake lights will also automatically Electric Park Brake Switch center console to manually engage the turn on in the same way as for normal electric park brake when the vehicle is braking with the use of the brake pedal. The electric parking brake can be stationary. engaged in two ways: Release the switch on the center console Noise may be heard from the rear of the to stop the braking action with the Manually, by pulling the switch on the vehicle when engaging the electric vehicle in motion. center console. parking brake. If, through this procedure, the vehicle is Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto A slight movement of the brake pedal braked until a speed below 1.9 mph Park Brake" conditions. may be detected when engaging the (3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept electric parking brake with the brake pulled, the park brake will definitively pedal pressed. engage. With the electric parking brake engaged, Note: Driving the vehicle with the the BRAKE warning light on the electric parking brake engaged, or using instrument panel and the switch will it several times to slow down the vehicle, illuminate. may cause severe damage to the braking system. 133 Disengaging The Electric Park Brake Do not leave the key fob in or near the "Drive Away Release": the electric park Manually vehicle or in a location accessible to brake will automatically disengage with In order to manually release the park children. A child could operate power the driver side seat belt fastened and the brake, the ignition should be in the ON windows, other controls, or move the detection of an action performed by the mode. Press the brake pedal, and then vehicle. driver to move the vehicle (forward gear push the switch on the center console Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged or reverse gear). This feature can be briefly. before driving; failure to do so can lead to turned on or off in the Information and Noise may be heard from the rear of the brake failure and a collision. Entertainment System. vehicle, and a slight movement of the Always fully apply the park brake when Note: If the car is equipped with brake pedal may be detected during leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause carbon-ceramic brake discs it is disengagement. damage or injury. necessary to fasten the seat belts or turn After disengaging the electric parking off the electric park brake before brake, the BRAKE warning light on the starting to avoid damages to the ceramic instrument panel and the light on the Caution! brake discs. switch will turn off. "Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is If the BRAKE warning light on the STARTING AND OPERATING Never use gear position PARK (P) instead of lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear instrument panel remains on with the the electric parking brake. Always engage selector is not in PARK (P) position and electric parking brake disengaged, this the electric parking brake when parking the the driver's intention of leaving the indicates a fault: in this case, contact an vehicle to prevent injury or damage caused vehicle is detected, the electric park authorized dealer. by the unexpected movement of the vehicle. brake will automatically engage to hold the vehicle in safety conditions. Electric Park Brake Operating Modes Warning! "Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed The electric park brake may operate as is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric follows: park brake will automatically engage Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or when the gear selector is in PARK (P) "Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode with access to an unlocked vehicle. position. The light on the switch located is activated by pulling the switch on the center console switches on Allowing children to be in a vehicle repeatedly while driving. unattended is dangerous for a number of together with the BRAKE warning light on reasons. A child or others could be seriously "Static Engagement and Release the instrument panel when the park brake or fatally injured. Children should be warned Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the is engaged and applied to the wheels. not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or electric park brake can be activated by Each automatic park brake engagement the gear selector. pulling the switch on the center console can be cancelled by pressing the switch once. On the other hand, push the switch on the center console and at the same and the brake pedal at the same time to time moving the gear selector for the disengage the brake. transmission to position PARK (P). 134 Note: The electric parking brake AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in automatically engages when the vehicle The vehicle can be equipped with an the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is is parked on roads with slope of more electronically controlled 8-speed locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against than 10%. automatic transmission where gear unwanted movement. Safe Hold shifting automatically takes place, When leaving the vehicle, always make depending on the vehicle usage sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, Safe Hold is a safety function that instantaneous parameters (vehicle remove the key fob from the vehicle, and automatically engages the electric park speed, grade, and accelerator pedal lock the vehicle. brake in the event of a dangerous position). Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or condition for the vehicle. The new transmission is an absolute with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing The electric park brake engages innovation, as it can match the children to be in a vehicle unattended is automatically to prevent vehicle Stop/Start system with the traditional dangerous for a number of reasons. A child movement if: automatic transmissions with built-in or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to The vehicle speed is below 2 mph torque converter. For further touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the (3 km/h). information, refer to the “Stop/Start” transmission gear selector. section within this chapter. A transmission operating mode Do not leave the key fob in or near the Manual gear shifting can still occur different from PARK (P) is activated. vehicle (or in a location accessible to thanks to the "sequential mode" position children), and do not leave the ignition in the The driver's seat belt is not fastened. for the gear selector. AVVor ON mode. A child could operate The driver side door is open. power windows, other controls, or move the Warning! vehicle. No attempts to apply pressure on the brake pedal have been detected. It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Caution! The “Safe Hold” function can be NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than temporarily disabled by pressing the idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing switch located on the center console and the brake pedal, the vehicle could Damage to the transmission may occur if the brake pedal at the same time, with accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. the following precautions are not observed: the vehicle stationary and the driver side Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE door open. someone or something. Only shift into gear only after the vehicle has come to a Once disabled, the function will activate when the engine is idling normally and your complete stop. foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. again when the vehicle speed reaches Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled Unintended movement of a vehicle could NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is to STOP and then to ON. injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all above idle speed. vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a Before shifting into any gear, make sure vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. the transmission into PARK, and turn the 135 Display AutoStick: + manually shift to higher gear; – manually shift to lower gear The following information is shown on the dedicated area of the display: The positions diagram is illustrated on the top of the gear selector. In Automatic Mode: the active mode (P,R, N, D) and with "D" the current gear number. In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential): the mode (M), the current gear and the double or single gear shift request, both

up and down (single or double arrow). 07076S0005EM Gear Selector 3 — Gear Selector Button

07076S0002EM The gear selector is a joystick style STARTING AND OPERATING Gear Selector Center Console shifting mechanism which returns to the 1 — Gear Selector center position automatically. It can be 2 — PARK (P) Button pushed forward twice and rearward twice, based on the starting condition. The PARK (P) mode can be The letter corresponding to the mode enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK selected on the gear selector lights up 07076S0001EM (P) button. Gear Display and appears on the instrument cluster display. To transition the vehicle into REVERSE Gear Selector (R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into To select a mode, move the gear selector DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R) The gear functioning is controlled by the forward or backwards, together with mode, it is necessary to move the gear gear selector, which can assume the pressing the brake pedal and button to selector by pushing the gear selector following positions: engage REVERSE (R). button. P = PARK When using AutoStick, activate it by R = REVERSE moving the gear selector from DRIVE (D) to the left and then forward toward the - N = NEUTRAL symbol or backward toward the + symbol D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed) and the gear is changed.

136 To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from To check that the PARK (P) mode is When leaving the vehicle, always make position NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE actually engaged, make sure (P) is sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, (D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle must be illuminated on the display and on the gear remove the key fob from the vehicle, and moving at a low speed or stopped, and selector. lock the vehicle. the brake pedal must also be pressed. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Note: Warning! with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is DO NOT accelerate while shifting dangerous for a number of reasons. A child from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) Never use the PARK position as a or others could be seriously or fatally to another position. substitute for the park brake. Always apply injured. Children should be warned not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or the After selecting a gear, wait a few the park brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible transmission gear selector. seconds before accelerating. This injury or damage. Do not leave the key fob in or near the precaution is particularly important with vehicle (or in a location accessible to engine cold. Yourvehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON mode. A child could operate power Transmission Operating Modes trying to move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make windows, other controls, or move the PARK (P) sure the transmission is in PARK before vehicle. The transmission is locked in this mode. leaving the vehicle. The engine can be started in this mode. It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Caution! Note: Never try to engage PARK (P) NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than mode when the vehicle is moving. Before idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could leaving the vehicle, make sure this mode Before moving the transmission gear accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. is engaged (letter P shown on the display selector out of PARK, you must push the and gear selector) and that the park Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF brake is engaged. when the engine is idling normally and your mode to the ON mode, and also press the When parking on a flat surface, first foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear engage the PARK (P) mode and then selector could result. Unintended movement of a vehicle could engage the electric park brake. injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all DO NOT race the engine when shifting When parking uphill, before activating vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear the PARK (P) mode, engage the electric while the engine is running. Before exiting a range, as this can damage the drivetrain. park brake. Otherwise, it could be vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift difficult to engage the (P) mode. the transmission into PARK, and turn the REVERSE (R) ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is Select this mode only with the vehicle at locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against a standstill. unwanted movement. 137 NEUTRAL (N) vehicle's optimal driving characteristics Use this range when the vehicle is are provided for all conditions. standing for prolonged periods with the AutoStick engine running. The engine may be In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for started in this range. Apply the electric sport driving, when the vehicle is driven park brake and shift the transmission with a heavy load or on slopes), it is into PARK (P) if you must leave the recommended to use the Autostick vehicle. (sequential shifting) mode to select and keep a lower fixed ratio. Warning! In these conditions, the use of a lower gear improves vehicle performance, 07076S0006EM preventing overheating. Steering Wheel Shift Paddles Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D) Note: If only one manual shift is the ignition to coast down a hill. These are mode to sequential mode regardless of necessary, the letter (D) will remain on unsafe practices that limit your response to vehicle speed. the display with the engaged gear next to changing traffic or road conditions. You STARTING AND OPERATING it. might lose control of the vehicle and have a Activation collision. Starting from DRIVE (D), move the Deactivation selector to the left (– and + indication of To deactivate the sequential driving DRIVE (D) the trim) to activate the sequential drive mode, bring the gear selector back in Use this mode in normal driving mode. The gear engaged will be shown on position DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving conditions. the display. mode). Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or Shifting is made by moving the gear REVERSE (R) modes must take place selector forwards, towards symbol – or Warning! only after releasing the accelerator backwards, towards symbol +. pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and Steering Column Mounted Shift brake pedal pressed. Paddles Do not downshift for additional engine This mode ensures automatic The gear can also be manually shifted by braking on a slippery surface. The drive engagement of the most suitable gears using the paddles behind the steering wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle for driving needs and maximum fuel could skid, causing a collision or personal wheel. Pull the right paddle (+) toward the injury. economy in terms of consumption. steering wheel and release it to engage a In this position, the transmission shifts higher gear, and perform the same the gears automatically, selecting the operation with the left paddle (-) to most suitable for forward driving among engage a lower gear. those available as you go. In this way the 138 Note: 1. Stop the vehicle. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Disabling To select the correct gear for 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), maximum deceleration (engine brake), if possible. If not, shift the transmission Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the just keep the gear paddle pulled (–): the to NEUTRAL (N). vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing transmission goes to an operating mode systems) inhibit the automatic activation in which the vehicle can slow down 3. Push and hold the ignition until the of PARK (P) mode when stopping the easily. engine turns OFF. engine, or proceed as described below: The vehicle will keep the gear 4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then 1. Vehicle at a standstill. restart the engine. selected by the driver until the safety 2. NEUTRAL (N) mode activated. conditions allow it. 5. Shift into the desired gear range. If 3. Push the ignition button for at least This means, for example, that the the problem is no longer detected, the three seconds. system will try to prevent the engine transmission will return to normal from switching off, automatically operation. The automatic park brake engagement downshifting if the engine speed is too Note: Even if the transmission can be function when the engine is stopped can low. reset, we recommend that you visit your also be deactivated on the Information authorized dealer at your earliest and Entertainment system by selecting Automatic Transmission Limp Home the following functions on the main menu: Mode possible convenience. Yourauthorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to "Settings", "Driver Assistance" and Transmission function is monitored determine if the problem could reoccur. If "Automatic Parking Brake". electronically for abnormal conditions. If the transmission cannot be reset, service Important Notes a condition is detected that could result is required at your authorized dealer. in transmission damage, Transmission Failure to comply with what is reported Limp Home Mode is activated. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock below may damage the transmission: System In this condition, the transmission stays Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the in fourth gear, regardless of the selected This vehicle is equipped with a Brake vehicle at a standstill. gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R) Transmission Shift Interlock system Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass and NEUTRAL (N) still work. (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied. from REVERSE to another mode only The symbol might light up in the with the vehicle at a standstill and engine instrument cluster. This system prevents you from moving idling. the gear selector from position PARK (P) Temporary failure unless the brakes are applied. Do not change between PARK (P), In the event of a momentary problem, the To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D) transmission can be reset to regain all the ignition must be cycled to the AVV modes with engine running at a speed forward gears by performing the mode (engine running or not) and the above idling. following steps: brake pedal must be pressed. 139 Before activating any transmission Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or ALFA DNA PRO SELECTOR operating mode, fully depress the brake with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing Alfa DNA Pro System pedal. children to be in a vehicle unattended is Note: The unexpected movement of the dangerous for a number of reasons. A child This vehicle is equipped with a Alfa DNA or others could be seriously or fatally Pro system selector (located on the vehicle can injure the occupants or injured. Children should be warned not to people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle center console). There are four modes of touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the operation to be selected according to with engine running: before getting out of transmission gear selector. the passenger compartment always driving style and road conditions: engage the electric park brake, select the Do not leave the key fob in or near the PARK (P) mode, stop the engine. vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the AVVor ON mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the Warning! vehicle.

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Caution!

STARTING AND OPERATING NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could Only engage the gear with engine at idling accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. while fully depressing the brake pedal. If the 07076S0004EM Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit Alfa DNA Pro System Selector someone or something. Only shift into gear transmission temperature exceeds the when the engine is idling normally and your normal operating limits, the transmission d = Dynamic (sports driving mode). foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. control unit may change the gear engagement order and reduce the drive n = Natural (mode for driving in normal Unintended movement of a vehicle could torque. If the transmission overheats, it conditions). injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all could operate incorrectly until it cools down. vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving while the engine is running. Before exiting a When using the vehicle with extremely mode for maximum fuel savings). vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift low external temperatures, the the transmission into PARK, and turn the transmission operation may change RACE = track race driving mode. ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in depending on the engine and transmission temperature, as well as vehicle speed. = Adjusts the calibration of the the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is active suspension. locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against Activation of the torque converter clutch unwanted movement. and of the eighth gear is inhibited until the Unlike the other modes, the RACE transmission oil is correctly warmed up. position does not latch; therefore, by When leaving the vehicle, always make Complete operation of the transmission will rotating the selector to RACE, it will sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, be enabled as soon as the fluid temperature remove the key fob from the vehicle, and reaches the predefined value. return to its initial position "d". lock the vehicle. 140 The symbol of the active mode lights up Activation "Dynamic" Mode in red on the selector. It is activated by rotating the selector to Activation On the instrument panel display, the the letter "n", the displays light up in blue. It is activated by rotating the selector to different modes are characterized by the letter "d", the displays light up in red. different colors: Natural - Blue Dynamic - Red Advanced Efficiency - Green RACE - Yellow

07116S0002EM Natural Mode 07116S0003EM The "Performance" screen graphically Dynamic Mode reproduces some parameters closely ESC and ASR systems: intervention linked to the efficiency of the driving thresholds that ensure more enjoyable, style, with a view to limiting consumption. sportier driving while guaranteeing the stability of the car.

07076S0003EM Engine and transmission: adoption of Mode Display sports mapping. Each driving mode is graphically different in frame color and contents of each individual "performance" screen. Warning! Driving Modes In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the "Natural" Mode accelerator pedal increases considerably. “Natural” Mode is characterized by Consequently, driving is less fluid and 07116S0001EM comfortable. engine and transmission: standard Natural Mode Performance Display response.

141 "Advanced Efficiency" Mode Activation It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "a", the displays light up in green.

07116S0006EM 07116S0008EM Dynamic Mode Performance Display Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance Display The "Performance" screen displays parameters related to vehicle stability, “RACE” Mode the graphs illustrate the trend of the Activation

STARTING AND OPERATING longitudinal/lateral accelerations 07116S0005EM It is activated by rotating the selector to (G-meter information), considering Advanced Efficiency Mode gravity acceleration as a reference unit. position "RACE", the displays light up in yellow. Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed ESC and ASR systems: intervention on the right. thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is advisable to select "Advanced Efficiency" mode in the presence of low-grip road surfaces. “Advanced Efficiency” Mode is characterized by reduced engine performance and ECO shifting strategy for the automatic transmission. The "Performance" screen graphically

displays some parameters closely 07116S0004EM related to the vehicle consumption. RACE Mode Engine and transmission: adoption of sports mapping.

142 Note: If the brake system overheats, this ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION is communicated by the Information and Warning! (AAS) Entertainment system. In this case, allow The vehicle's electronic suspension the system to cool for a few minutes by management system is aimed at It is recommended to activate this mode driving the vehicle normally without optimizing the vehicle's performance. at the track. operating the brakes. The system continuously monitors the In "RACE", the sensitivity of the Driving Mode Deactivation damping of the suspension through the accelerator pedal increases considerably. To deactivate any driving mode, simply actuator installed on each shock Consequently, driving is less fluid and move the selector to any other mode. absorber. The calibration of the shock comfortable. absorbers can be adjusted to the Note: conditions of the road surface and to the The "Performance" screen displays When the engine is next started, the dynamic conditions of the vehicle, parameters related to vehicle stability, "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and improving its comfort and road handling. the graphs illustrate the trend of the "Natural" mode selected previously is The driver can choose, even while driving, longitudinal/lateral accelerations retained. The system will reactivate in (only in "d" or "RACE" mode), between two (G-meter information), considering "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or types of suspension calibration: a more gravity acceleration as a reference unit. "Natural" mode, depending on which sporty ride or a more comfortable one. The screen displays the lateral and mode was selected before the engine By pushing the button, the system will longitudinal acceleration peaks. was stopped. work with the shock absorber calibration When the engine is next started, the which favors driving comfort. "RACE" mode selected previously is not retained. The system will reactivate in "Dynamic" mode. It is not possible to go directly from "Dynamic" mode to "Advanced Efficiency" mode and vice versa. You must always activate the “Natural” mode first and then select the other mode.

05036S0014EM

RACE Mode Performance Display 04306S0001EM Alfa Active Suspension Button If the system fails, the following symbol will appear in the instrument cluster display . 143 STOP/START SYSTEM Engine stopping is signaled by the System Activation symbol lighting up on the instrument Stop/Start System The activation of the system is indicated cluster display. by the symbol lighting up on the The Stop/Start system automatically Restarting the Engine display. In this condition, the light on the shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop button is off. if the required conditions are met. To restart the engine, release the brake Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. System Deactivation pedal will automatically restart the With the brake pressed and the A message will appear on the display engine. transmission in automatic mode DRIVE when the system is deactivated. In this The function was developed to increase (D), the engine will restart by shifting to condition, the light on the button is on. vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to Note: Each time the engine is started, consumption, gas emissions, and sound "AutoStick". the system is activated regardless of pollution. With brake pressed if the gear selector is where was when it was previously in "AutoStick" mode, the engine will switched off. Operating Mode restart by shifting to PARK (P) or by Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not moving the selector to + or -. Stopping the Engine Autostop STARTING AND OPERATING With vehicle at a standstill and brake System Manual Activation/ For higher comfort and increased safety, pedal pressed, the engine switches off if Deactivation the gear selector is in a position other and to reduce emissions, there are than REVERSE (R). To manually activate/deactivate the certain conditions where the engine will system, push the button located in the not autostop despite the system being The system does not operate when the control panel on the left of the steering active, such as: gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order wheel. to making parking maneuvers easier. Engine still cold. In the event of stops uphill, engine Especially cold outside temperature. switching off is disabled to make the "Hill Start Assist" function available (works Battery not sufficiently charged. only with running engine). Driver's door not shut. NOTE: The engine can only be Driver's seat belt not fastened. automatically stopped after having run at about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking automatic restart, the vehicle only needs maneuvers). to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) to stop the engine. 07126S0051EM Stop/Start Button

144 With the automatic climate control Safety Functions active, an adequate cabin heating or When the engine is stopped through the cooling comfort has not been reached or Stop/Start system, if the driver releases with MAX-DEF function active. their seat belt, opens the driver's or During the first period of use, to passenger's door, or opens the hood from initialize the system. inside the vehicle, the engine can be restarted only by using the ignition. Steering angle beyond threshold. This condition is indicated to the driver Engine Restarting Conditions both through a buzzer and a message on the instrument cluster display. Due to comfort, emission control and 07126S0002EM safety reasons, the engine can restart Irregular Operation Battery Power Supply automatically without any action by the In the event of malfunction, the driver, under special conditions, such as: 1 — Socket Stop/Start system is deactivated. 2 — Sensor Battery not sufficiently charged. For failure indications, see the "Warning 3 — Connector Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. Lights and Messages" paragraph, if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly). "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" chapter. Note: After setting the ignition to STOP Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on and having closed the driver side door, roads with a grade). Vehicle Inactivity wait at least one minute before Engine stopping by the Stop/Start In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the disconnecting the electrical supply from system for more than approx. three battery is replaced), special attention the battery. When reconnecting the minutes. must be paid to the disconnection of the electrical supply to the battery, make battery power supply. sure that the ignition is in the STOP mode With the automatic climate control Proceed as follows: and the driver side door is closed. active, an adjustment in cabin heating or cooling is made or with MAX-DEF Remove connector from socket to function active. disconnect sensor (battery status monitoring) installed on the negative pole of the battery. This sensor should never be disconnected from the pole except if the battery is replaced.

145 SPEED LIMITER Programmed Speed Icon Flashing Description The programmed speed will flash in the following scenarios: This feature allows the speed of the vehicle to be limited to speeds, which can When the accelerator pedal has been be set by the driver. fully pressed and the vehicle has The maximum speed can be set with the exceeded the programmed speed. vehicle stationary or in motion. The Activating the system after setting a minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph limit below the effective speed of the (30mk/h). vehicle. When this feature is active, the vehicle 07136S0001EM In the event of overtake acceleration. speed depends on the pressing of the Speed Limiter Display accelerator pedal until the programmed Speed Limit Programming Deactivation speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit Programming" paragraph). The speed limit can be programmed The feature can be activated/ through the Information and deactivated through the Information and

STARTING AND OPERATING Activation Entertainment System. Entertainment System. The feature can be activated/ To access the function on the main menu, Deactivating The Device deactivated through the Information and select the following items in sequence: To access this feature on the main menu, Entertainment System. "Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter select the following items in sequence: Activating The Device Set Speed". "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and To access this feature on the main menu, By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed “OFF”. increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), from a select the following items in sequence: Automatic Deactivation Of The Device "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h). The device deactivates automatically in “ON”. the event of fault in the system. In this The activation of this feature is signaled Exceeding The Programmed Speed case, contact an authorized dealer. by the displaying of the green symbol By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, along with the last speed set. The Speed Temporary Signal Loss the programmed speed can be exceeded Limiter feature can remain active When the devices loses the signal, the even with the device active (e.g. in the concurrently with the Speed Control white symbol without the speed event of overtaking). system. If a speed limit below the one indication illuminates on the display. The device is disabled until the speed indicated in the Speed Control is System Failure selected, the Speed Control speed will be drops below the set limit, after which it lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This reactivates automatically. If there is a system failure, the amber function remains available in RACE mode. symbol illuminates on the display. 146 SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE The activation of the system is signaled by the white warning light illuminating CONTROL) Warning! on the instrument cluster. Speed Control Description The Speed Control function can remain This is an electronically controlled driving Speed Control can be dangerous where the active at the same time as the Speed assistance feature that allows the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Limiter System. If the set speed is higher desired vehicle speed to be maintained, Yourvehicle could go too fast for the than the speed set with the Speed without having to press the accelerator conditions, and you could lose control and Limiter, the set speed will be lowered to pedal. This feature can be used at a speed have an accident. Do not use Speed Control that of the Speed Limiter. in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long icy, snow-covered or slippery. This function remains available in RACE stretches of dry, straight roads with few mode. variations (highways). Activating Note: The system cannot be engaged in The speed control buttons are located on FIRST or REVERSE gear. It is advisable to the left side of the steering wheel. To activate the Speed Control System, engage it in THIRD gear or higher if using push the on/off button location on the Note: the Autostick feature. left side of the steering wheel. To ensure correct operation, the speed control is designed to deactivate Warning! if more than one function is operated simultaneously. In this case, the system Leaving the Speed Control system on when can be reactivated by pushing the on/off not in use is dangerous. Youcould button and setting the desired accidentally set the system or cause it to go speed. faster than you want. Youcould lose control and have an accident. Always leave the It is not recommended to use this system OFF when you are not using it. feature in city traffic. While driving downhill, the system could brake the vehicle to keep the set speed 07146S0001EM the same. Speed Control On/Off Switch

147 Setting The Desired Speed Increasing/Decreasing Speed On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed may be considerable and is advisable to To set a desired speed, proceed as Increasing Speed deactivate the Speed Control. follows: Once the Speed Control has been Note: The system keeps the speed set activated, the speed can be increased by 1. Turn the Speed Control on. even uphill and downhill. A slight variation pushing the SET switch upward. in the speed on slight rises is completely 2. When the vehicle has reached the By keeping the switch pushed, the set normal. desired speed, push the SET switch up or speed will increase until the switch is down and release to activate. When the released. The new speed will then be set. Recalling The Speed accelerator is released, the vehicle will At every movement of the SET switch, Once the system has been deactivated, maintain the selected speed the set speed can be adjusted. but not canceled, the previously set automatically. Decreasing Speed speed can be recalled by pushing the RES button and removing your foot from the When the system is active, to reduce the accelerator. The system will be set to the speed, push the SET switch downward. last stored speed. By keeping the switch pushed, the set Note: Before resuming the previously STARTING AND OPERATING speed will decrease until the switch is set speed, you must accelerate to a released. The new speed will then be set. speed close to that speed. At every movement of the SET switch, the set speed can be adjusted. Note: Moving the SET switch allows to adjust the speed according to the

07146S0002EM selected unit of measurement set on the SET Switch Location Information and Entertainment System (see dedicated supplement). If needed (when overtaking for instance), you can accelerate beyond the set speed Accelerating When Overtaking by pressing the accelerator. When you Press the accelerator as you would release the pedal, the vehicle will return normally. When the pedal is released, the

to the previously set speed. vehicle will return to the set speed. 07146S0003EM When traveling downhill with the system Resume Button Location Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes active, the vehicle speed may slightly In Autostick (sequential) mode, before exceed the set one. The system can automatically downshift to keep the set speed when driving on resuming the previously set speed, you Note: Before pushing the SET switch, the hilly routes. should accelerate until you are close to vehicle must be traveling at a constant that speed. Then, push and release the speed on a flat surface. RES button. 148 Deactivating ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL Lightly pressing the brake pedal (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED deactivates the speed control without System Description deleting the set speed. The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a The speed control may also be driver assist system that combines the deactivated by applying the electric park speed control functions with controlling brake or when the braking system is the distance from the vehicle ahead. operated (e.g. operation of the ESC system). The system allows to set and hold the vehicle at the desired speed without The set speed is deleted in the following needing to press the accelerator. It also cases: 06016S0004EM allows to set and hold a distance from the Windshield Camera Location Pushing the on/off button a second vehicle ahead (these settings are set by time. the driver). This system enhances driving comfort while on the highway or out of town with The ignition is cycled to STOP. The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses a light traffic. radar sensor located behind the front If there is a malfunction with the bumper and a camera located in the If the sensor does not detect a vehicle Speed Control. center/upper part of the windshield, to ahead, the system will maintain a fixed detect the presence of a vehicle close set speed. ahead. If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the system automatically intervenes by braking (or accelerating) slightly in order not to exceed the original set speed, so that the vehicle keeps the preset distance, seeking to adapt to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Note: Adaptive Cruise Control performance is not guaranteed under the following circumstances, and it is recommended to turn the system off when: 06016S0003EM Front Bumper Radar Location Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow. Driving in heavy traffic or construction zones.

149 Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop roads with steep climbs and descents, or while following a target vehicle and hold the roads with numerous turns and bends. vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not Entering a turn lane. start moving within 3 minutes the parking When circumstances do not allow brake will be activated, and the ACC system safe driving at a constant speed. will be canceled. Youshould switch off the ACC system: When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy Warning! snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones). 07146S0010EM Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a On/Off Button When entering a turn lane or highway off convenience system. It is not a substitute ramp; when driving on roads that are When the system is enabled and ready to for active driving involvement. It is always winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have operate, the display shows the white icon the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of steep uphill or downhill slopes. above dashes in place of the speed. road, traffic, and weather conditions, STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; When circumstances do not allow safe and, most importantly, brake operation to driving at a constant speed. ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention is always required while driving to maintain Activation/Deactivation safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow The system has four operating states: these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. Enabled (speed not set) The ACC system: Activated (speed set) Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming Paused vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a 07146S0016EM stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled Deactivated Enabled Icons vehicle). Enabling/Activating Cannot take street, traffic, and weather Setting a speed activates the system. conditions into account, and may be limited To enable the system, push and release The display shows the icon in green with upon adverse sight distance conditions. the button located on the left side on the set speed. the steering wheel. Does not always fully recognize complex Note: The system cannot be enabled driving conditions, which can result in wrong when RACE mode is active. or missing distance warnings.

150 When the ESC (or ABS or other stability control systems) are operating Warning! or have just operated. When the ESC system is off. Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You When the Forward Collision Warning could accidentally set the system or cause it system is braking automatically. to go faster than you want. Youcould lose control and have a collision. Always leave In the event of system failure. the system off when you are not using it. When the engine is OFF.

07146S0017EM In case of obstruction of the radar Pausing/Deactivating SET Switch sensor (in this case the bumper area With the feature enabled (speed not set), where it is located must be cleaned). push the button to disable. While the accelerator pedal is pressed, the system will not be able to control the If the system is set, the conditions With the feature active (speed set), push distance between the vehicle and the one described above also cause a the button to pause. The display will ahead. In this case, the speed will be cancellation or deactivation of the show the icon in white with the speed in determined only by the position of the system. These situations may vary brackets. To deactivate the feature, push accelerator pedal. according to the conditions. the button a second time. The system will return to normal Note: The system will not be deactivated Setting The Desired Speed operation as soon as the accelerator when speeds higher than those set are The speed can be set from a minimum of pedal is released. reached by pressing the accelerator 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of The system cannot be set: pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In 110 mph (180 km/h). these situations, the system may not When pressing the brake pedal. work correctly and it is recommended to When the vehicle reaches the desired deactivate it. speed, push the SET switch upward or When the brakes are overheated. downward and release it to activate the When the electric park brake has been To VaryThe Speed Setting system. When the accelerator is released, operated. Increasing Speed the vehicle will maintain the set speed automatically. When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R) or Once the system has been activated, you NEUTRAL (N) is engaged. can increase the speed by pushing the SET switch upward. Each time the switch When the engine rpm is above a is pushed, the speed increases by 1 mph. maximum threshold. By pushing and holding the switch When the vehicle speed is not within upward, the set speed will increase in the operational speed range. increments of 5 mph until the switch is released. Then, the new speed will be set. 151 Decreasing Speed The transmission could shift to a Once the system has been activated, you lower gear when driving downhill, or can decrease the speed by pushing the when accelerating. This is normal and SET switch downward. Each time necessary to maintain the set speed the switch is pushed, the speed The system will disable while driving decreases by 1 mph. if the brakes overheat. By pushing and holding the switch downward, the set speed will decrease in Accelerating When Overtaking increments of 5 mph until the switch is When driving with ACC activated and released. Then, the new speed will be set. following a vehicle, the system will Note: provide an additional acceleration up to 07146S0018EM Moving the SET switch allows you to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the RES (Resume) Button adjust the speed according to the vehicle. This additional acceleration is Before returning to the previously set selected unit of measurement ("US" or triggered when the driver utilizes the left speed, bring the speed close to that "Metric") set on the Information and turn signal and will only be active when value, then push the RES button and passing on the left hand side. STARTING AND OPERATING Entertainment System (see dedicated release it. supplement). The system detects the direction of traffic automatically when the vehicle When the unit of measurement is set passes from left-hand traffic to to Metric, pushing and holding the SET Warning! right-hand traffic. In this case, the switch will adjust the speed in 10 km/h overtaking assist function is only active increments. when the reference vehicle is overtaken The Resume function should only be used if By keeping the accelerator pedal on the right. The additional acceleration traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming depressed, the vehicle can continue to is deactivated when the driver uses the a set speed that is too high or too low for accelerate beyond the set speed. In this right direction indicator and returns to prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate case, use the SET switch to set the the original lane. too sharply for safe operation. Failure to speed to the vehicle’s current speed. Resuming The Speed follow these warnings can result in a collision When you push the SET button to and death or serious personal injury. Once the system has been canceled but reduce the speed, the braking system not deactivated, to resume a previously intervenes automatically if the engine set speed, simply push the RES button Setting The Distance Between Vehicles brake does not slow the vehicle down and remove your foot from the sufficiently to reach the set speed. The The distance between your vehicle and accelerator to recall it. device holds the set speed uphill and the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar downhill; however a slight variation is The system will be set to the last stored (short), two bars (medium), three bars entirely normal, particularly on slight speed. (long), or four bars (maximum). inclines. 152 Warning!

The maximum breaking applied by the system is limited. The driver may apply the brakes in all cases if needed. If the system predicts that the braking level is insufficient to hold the set distance, either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is displayed to warn the driver of approaching 07146S0019EM 07146S0015EM the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also Distance Icons Distance Button emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake The distances from the vehicle ahead are The set speed is held if there are no immediately as necessary to hold a safe proportional to speed. vehicles ahead. Once the shortest distance from the vehicle ahead. The interval of time with relation to the distance has been selected, the next push The driver is responsible for ensuring that vehicle ahead remains constant and of the button will set the maximum there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or varies from one second (for the short distance. objectives along the direction of the vehicle. Failure to comply with these precautions distance one-bar setting) to two seconds If a slower vehicle is detected in the same may cause serious accidents and injuries. (for the maximum distance four-bar lane, the vehicle icon on the display setting). illuminates from grey to white. The The driver is fully responsible for holding a safe distance from the vehicle ahead The set distance is shown on the display system automatically adjusts the vehicle’s speed to keep the set distance, respecting the highway code in force in the by a dedicated icon. respective country. The setting is four (maximum) the first independently of the set speed. time the system is used. After the The vehicle holds the set distance until: “Stop And Go” Function distance has been modified by the driver, The vehicle ahead accelerates to a the new distance will be stored also after speed higher than the set speed. The “Stop and Go” operating strategy the system is deactivated and allows you to maintain a safe distance reactivated. The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or from the vehicle ahead until the vehicle the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise To Decrease The Distance has completely stopped. It will also Control system sensor. restart the vehicle automatically if the Push and release the distance button to The distance setting is changed. vehicle ahead drives away within two decrease the distance setting. The seconds, otherwise it is necessary to distance setting decreases by one bar The Adaptive Cruise Control system is press the accelerator pedal or push the (shorter) every time the button is pushed. deactivated/paused. RES button to restart.

153 This could be due to an obstruction of the Steering And Curves vehicle’s sensor or camera. It could also Warning! Driving on curves with the system set be due to a fault in the system. If an could limit speed and acceleration to obstruction is detected, clean the area of guarantee vehicle stability, even if no When the ACC system is resumed, the driver the windshield opposite the interior rear vehicles are detected ahead. must ensure that there are no pedestrians, view mirror, where the camera is located, When leaving the curve, the system vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. as well as the area of the front bumper resets the previously set speed. Failure to follow these warnings can result in where the sensor is located. Then check a collision and death or serious personal that the message has disappeared. injury. When the conditions limiting the system functions end, normal operation will Deactivation resume. The system is deactivated and the set Should the fault persist, contact an speed is canceled if: authorized dealer. The button on the Adaptive Cruise Precautions While Driving

STARTING AND OPERATING Control is pushed (with the system The system may not work correctly in enabled or paused). some driving conditions (see below). The The ignition is cycled to STOP. driver must control the vehicle at all 07146S0011EM times. Steering And Curves RACE mode is activated. Vehicle Not Aligned Note: The system is canceled (the set speed and distance are stored): The system may not detect a vehicle In cases of narrow curves, the traveling in the same lane, in the same performance of the system could be When the system is paused (refer to direction, but is not aligned. It also may limited. In this case, it is advisable to the “Activation / Deactivation” section). not detect a vehicle which is cutting in deactivate the system. from a side lane. Sufficient distance from When the conditions shown in the The system only limits the speed the vehicles ahead may not be “Setting The Desired Speed” section DURING a bend and not BEFORE it. occur. guaranteed in these cases. The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and Using The System On Slopes Limited Operation Warning out of the driving lane causing the vehicle When driving on roads with a variable If the dedicated message is shown on the to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. incline, the system may not detect the display, a condition limiting the Adaptive presence of a vehicle in the lane. System Cruise Control operation may have performance could be limited according occurred. to speed, load, traffic conditions and steep slopes. 154 Lane Change The system may not detect the presence of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane.

07146S0013EM 06016V0008EM Small Vehicles Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction Sufficient distance from the vehicles 07146S0012EM ahead may not be guaranteed in these General Information Lane Change cases. This vehicle has systems that operate on In this case, sufficient distance from the Stationary Objects And Vehicles radio frequency that comply with Part vehicle which is changing lanes may not The system cannot detect the presence 15 of the Federal Communications be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the of stationary vehicles or objects. For Commission (FCC) rules and with utmost attention at all times and be example, the system will not operate if Industry Canada Standards RSS- always ready to apply the brakes if the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a GEN/210/220/310. needed. vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in Operation is subject to the following two Small Vehicles that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all conditions: Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and times and be always ready to apply the brakes if needed. 1. The device may not cause harmful motorcycles) traveling near the outer interference. edges of the lane or which enter the lane Objects And Vehicles Moving In from curb side are not detected until they Opposite Or Crosswise Direction 2. The device must accept any interference received, including are fully in the lane. The system cannot detect the presence interference that may cause undesired of objects or vehicles traveling in operation of the device. opposite or crosswise directions and consequently will not activate. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

155 PARK SENSOR SYSTEM Engagement/Disengagement System Activation/Deactivation Vehicles With Front And Rear Sensors To turn the system off, push the Park When the REVERSE gear is engaged and Sensors System switch located to the the system is on, the front and rear The parking sensors, located in the front left of the headlight switch. The indicator sensors are activated. If the vehicle and rear bumpers, detect the presence of light within the switch will illuminate moves from REVERSE to a forward gear, any obstacles and warn the driver when the system is turned off. Pushing the rear sensors are deactivated, while through an acoustic signal and visual the switch a second time will turn the the front sensors remain active until the indications will be displayed on the system back on, and the indicator light speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded. instrument cluster. will turn off. Note: In certain operating conditions, the system could start detecting an obstacle only after the vehicle has moved slightly (a few inches). Acoustic Signal In the presence of an obstacle at the front or the rear of the vehicle, an

STARTING AND OPERATING acoustic signal with variable frequency will sound: The acoustic signal increases in

07176S0003EM frequency as the distance between the 07176S0052EM Front Sensor Location Park Sensors System On/Off Switch vehicle and the obstacle decreases. The indicator light within the Park The acoustic signal becomes Sensors System switch will also be on in continuous when the distance between case of system failure. If the switch is the vehicle and the obstacle is less than pushed with a system failure, the 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the indicator light will flash for distance increases. approximately five seconds. The light will The acoustic signal is constant if the then stay on constantly. distance between the vehicle and the Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, obstacle is unchanged. the Park Sensors system keeps the last Note: If the sensors detect several front state when the engine was stopped and rear obstacles, the closest obstacle 07176S0001EM (activated or deactivated) in its memory. Rear Sensor Location is considered. An intermittent signal will sound if the obstacles are at the same distance (front and rear). 156 When the system emits an acoustic If several obstacles are detected Audio System Not Available:Ifthe signal, the volume of the Information and simultaneously in the front and rear area, display shows a message that the audio Entertainment System, if activated, is the display will show all of them, system is not available, it means that the automatically lowered. regardless of the area in which they were acoustic signal will be emitted by the detected. instrument panel, and not through the Indication On Display In general, the vehicle is closer to the vehicles speakers. The driver can select the type of warning obstacle when a single or several flashing they would like to be displayed through Note: Some conditions may influence arcs are shown on the display and the the Information and Entertainment the performance of the Park Sensors acoustic signal becomes continuous. System. To access the function on the System: It is not possible to exit from the display main menu, select in the following order: Reduced sensor sensitivity could be screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE. 1. “Settings.” due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or Fault Indication thick paint on the surface of the sensor. 2. “Driver Assistance.” Parking sensor faults, if any, will be The sensors may detect a false 3. “ParkSense.” indicated by a message on the display on obstacle (echo interference) due to the instrument cluster. Refer to "Warning mechanical interference, for example 4. “Mode.” Lights And Messages" in "Getting To when washing the vehicle or in extreme Know YourInstrument Panel" for further weather. 5. “Sound-Display.” information. Visual Indications The signals sent by the sensors can Messages On The Display The system indicates the presence of an be altered by the presence of ultrasonic In case of system failure, a dedicated obstacle by displaying a single red arc in systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems message appears on the instrument the detected areas, in relation to the of or pneumatic drills) near the cluster for about five seconds. distance of the object and the position of vehicle. the vehicle. Cleaning The Front Or Rear Sensors: System performance can be If the obstacle is detected in the front or If the display shows a message requiring influenced by the position of the rear central area, a single red arc will be the sensors to be cleaned, make sure that sensors. For example, due to a change in displayed as the obstacle approaches, the outer surface and the underside of the ride setting (caused by wear to the first constant, then flashing, in addition the front and rear bumpers are free of shock absorbers or suspension), by to an acoustic signal. debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once changing tires, overloading the vehicle or If the obstacle is detected in the front or these areas are clear, cycle the ignition to operations that require the vehicle to be rear left and/or right area, a single red STOP.Then, return it to ON mode. If the lowered. flashing arc will be shown in the message is still displayed, contact an authorized dealer. Be sure not to place bumper stickers corresponding area on the display and or other adhesives over the sensors as the system will emit an acoustic signal, this will affect system performance. either at frequent intervals or constantly. 157 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING Camera operation may also be Warning! (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED compromised by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield, Description by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are Drivers must be careful when backing up The Lane Departure Warning system uses driving not aligned with yours, vehicle even when using the Parking Sensor system. a forward looking camera located on the driving in a transverse or opposite way on Always check carefully behind your vehicle, windshield to detect lane markings and the same lane, bend with a small radius of and be sure to check for pedestrians, curvature), by road surface conditions and measure vehicle position within the lane by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or boundaries. blind spots before backing up. Youare Make sure the windshield is always clean. responsible for the safety of your When one or both lane limits are Use specific detergents and clean cloths to surroundings and must continue to pay detected and the vehicle passes over one avoid scratching the windshield. The camera attention while backing up. Failure to do so without an activated turn signal, the operation may also be limited or absent in can result in serious injury or death. system emits a visual as well as an some driving, traffic and road surface audible signal. conditions. If the vehicle continues to go beyond the If the windshield must be replaced due to Caution! line of the lane without any intervention scratches, chipping or breakage, contact STARTING AND OPERATING from the driver, the surpassed line will exclusively your authorized dealer. Do not light up on the display (left or right) to replace the windshield on your own. It is The Parking Sensor system is only a advisable to replace the windshield if it is parking aid and it is unable to recognize urge the driver to bring the vehicle back damaged in the area of the camera. every obstacle, including small obstacles. into the limits of the lane. Parking curbs might be temporarily System Activation/Deactivation detected or not detected at all. Obstacles Caution! located above or below the sensors will not The system is activated/deactivated by be detected when they are in close proximity pushing the button located on the end of Do not tamper with nor operate on the the multifunction lever. The vehicle must be driven slowly when camera. Do not close the openings in the using the Parking Sensor system in order to aesthetic cover located under the interior be able to stop in time when an obstacle is rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of detected. It is recommended that the driver the camera, contact your authorized dealer. looks over his/her shoulder when using the The camera may have limited or absent Parking Sensor system. operation due to weather conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, formation of ice layers on the windshield.

158 Symbols And Messages On The Display Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A Single Limit The Lane Departure Warning system advises the driver when the vehicle When the system is active and only, for leaves the driving lane by showing example, the left lane limit has been symbols and messages on the instrument detected, the detected lane illuminates in cluster display. white on the display; the system is ready to provide visual warnings on the display in the event of unintentional exiting of the lane (turn signal not activated) to the left.

07226S0001EM Lane Departure Warning System Activation/Deactivation Button Note: When the engine is started, the system maintains the operating mode that was selected when it was turned

OFF. 07226S0002EM Activation Conditions Vehicle Changing Lanes Once turned on, the system becomes When the system is active and the lane active only if the following conditions are limits have not been detected, the display 07226S0003EM met: shows a grey vehicle icon with two grey Left Lane Limit Detected lines. The vehicle speed is above 37 mph When the system detects that the vehicle (60 km/h). has approached the lane line and is about The lane limit lines are visible at least to pass it, the left line on the display on one side. illuminates in yellow. There are suitable visibility conditions. The road is straight or with wide radius bends. A suitable distance is kept from the vehicle in front. The turn signal is not active. 07226S0007EM Lane Limits Not Detected 159 When lane limits are detected, the To access the function, from the main system is ready to provide indications in menu select the following in order: case the driver unintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal not activated). 1. “Settings.” As the Lane Departure Warning system 2. “Safety.” detects the lane limits while the vehicle is in motion, it will adjust the display 3. “Lane Departure Warning.” accordingly (from white to yellow and 4. “Sensitivity.” vice versa, and increase their thickness). Limited Operation Warning

07226S0004EM If a message appears on the display, a Left Lane Limit Approached condition limiting the Lane Departure Warning system operation may have The system operates in the same way, occurred. This could be an obstruction of but mirrored, in the event of exiting the the camera view, or a fault in the system. right lane when only the right lane limit If an obstruction is detected, clean the

STARTING AND OPERATING has been detected. area of the windshield by the interior rear Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both view mirror. Limits Although the vehicle can still be driven in

When the system is active, both lane lines 07226S0006EM normal conditions, the system may not on the display illuminate in white to Right Lane Limit Approached function properly. indicate the successful detection of both When the conditions limiting the system If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by limits. are corrected, it will go back to normal an audible signal as well as the visual operation. Should a fault persist, contact indication in the instrument cluster. The your authorized dealer. signal is emitted through the speakers on the side of the lane limit which is being System Failure Warning crossed (eg. if the vehicle is exceeding If the system turns off and the warning the left line of the lane, the audible signal light appears on the display, it means will come from the speakers on the left of that there is a system fault. the vehicle). In this case, it is still possible to drive the Changing The System Settings vehicle, but you are advised to contact The system's sensitivity can be set your authorized dealer as soon as through the Information and possible. 07226S0005EM Both Lane Limits Detected Entertainment System. Sensitivity “High” or “Low” can be selected. 160 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will DYNAMIC GRIDLINES activate the display of the dynamic guidelines that indicate the route of the Description vehicle while in REVERSE. The Rear Back-Up Camera is located just under the vehicle’s trunk lid, above the Warning! rear license plate.

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Back-Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, 07186S000218 and be sure to check for pedestrians, Rear Back-Up Camera Display animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or Rear Back-Up Camera Features blind spots before backing up. Youare responsible for the safety of your To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera surroundings and must continue to pay features, select “Settings” from the Main attention while backing up. Failure to do so Menu of the Information and can result in serious injury or death. Entertainment System. 07186S0001EM Under “Driver Assistance” the following Rear Back-Up Camera Location features can be selected: Caution! When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the View Information and Entertainment System display will show the area behind the Camera Delay To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back-Up vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-Up Camera should only be used as a parking Camera Guidelines aid. The Rear Back-Up Camera is unable to Camera, along with a warning message. view every obstacle or object in your drive Selecting “View” will activate the camera path. view on the display. Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must camera view to remain on the display be driven slowly when using the Rear Back-Up Camera to be able to stop in time shortly after the vehicle is no longer in when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended REVERSE, followed by the previously that the driver look frequently over his/her active screen. shoulder when using the Rear Back-Up Camera.

161 Symbols And Messages On The Display Messages On The Display REFUELING THE VEHICLE Indications On The Display If the trunk lid is lifted, the camera will Refueling The Vehicle not detect any obstacle behind the Through the Information and vehicle. The display will show a dedicated Before refueling, make sure that the fuel Entertainment System settings, by warning message. type is correct. activating the "Camera Guidelines" feature, guidelines can be seen on the Make sure the trunk lid is closed by Also, stop the engine before refueling. rear camera display. If activated, the pushing next to the lock until it clicks. Note: An inefficient catalytic converter guidelines are positioned on the image to Important Notes leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus highlight the width of the vehicle and the contributing to air pollution. expected reverse path based on the Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the steering wheel position. camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is important to keep the camera surface Caution! A superimposed central line indicates the clean, and free from debris. center of the vehicle to assist in rear parking maneuvers. The various colored When parking, be aware of obstacles Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, areas indicate the distance from the rear that may be above or under the camera even in small amounts in an emergency, as this would damage the catalytic converter

STARTING AND OPERATING of the vehicle. range. beyond repair. The table below shows the approximate distances for each area: Refueling Capacity

Distance from the To ensure that you fill the tank Area rear of the vehicle completely, top off twice after the first click of the fuel nozzle. Red 0–11.8 inches (0–30 cm) Further top-off could cause faults in the 11.8 inches to 3.3 feet fuel feeding system. Yellow (30cm–1m) 3.3 feet or more Green (1mormore)

162 Refueling Procedure The label indicates the fuel type (UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline). The fuel filler door is unlocked when the Warning! central door locking system is unlocked. It is automatically locked when the central locking system is applied. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open Opening The Fuel Filler Door or the tank is being filled. To refuel proceed as follows: Never add fuel when the engine is running. 1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on This is in violation of most state and federal the point shown by the arrow. fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on. A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a 07206S0002EM vehicle. Youcould be burned. Always place Fuel Door Label gas containers on the ground while filling. Emergency Fuel Door Opening In the event of an emergency the fuel Note: If the filler compartment is filler door can be opened by operating washed with a pressure washer, keep it at from inside the trunk. a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm). Proceed as follows:

07206S0001EM 1. Open the trunk and locate the Fuel Door emergency fuel filler release cap on the inside lining. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap. 2. Open the cap, and pull the cord inside 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the to unlock the fuel filler door. filler pipe. 3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing 4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts on it (see the previous instructions). off, before removing the nozzle, wait for at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel to flow inside the tank. 5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly tightened. 163 VEHICLE LOADING Payload Rim Size Certification Label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the This is the rim size that is appropriate for As required by National Highway Traffic allowable load weight a truck can carry, the tire size listed. including the weight of the driver, all Safety Administration regulations, your Inflation Pressure vehicle has a certification label affixed to passengers, options and cargo. the driver's side door or . Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) This is the cold tire inflation pressure for This label contains the month and year of your vehicle for all loading conditions up manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight The GAWR is the maximum permissible to full GAWR. load on the front and rear axles. The load Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating Curb Weight (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle must be distributed in the cargo area so Identification Number (VIN). A that the GAWR of each axle is not The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is exceeded. the total weight of the vehicle with all included on this label and indicates the Each axle GAWR is determined by the fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The components in the system with the capacity conditions, and with no bar code that appears on the bottom of lowest load carrying capacity (axle, occupants or cargo loaded into the

STARTING AND OPERATING the label is your VIN. springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or vehicle. The front and rear curb weight suspension components sometimes values are determined by weighing your Gross Vehicle Weight Rating specified by purchasers for increased vehicle on a commercial scale before any (GVWR) durability does not necessarily increase occupants or cargo are added. the vehicle's GVWR. The GVWR is the total permissible Loading weight of your vehicle including driver, Tire Size passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The actual total weight and the weight of The label also specifies maximum The tire size on the Vehicle Certification the front and rear of your vehicle at the capacities of front and rear axle systems Label represents the actual tire size on ground can best be determined by (GAWR). Total load must be limited so your vehicle. Replacement tires must be weighing it when it is loaded and ready GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not equal to the load capacity of this tire size. for operation. exceeded.

164 The entire vehicle should first be weighed TRAILER TOWING SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING on a commercial scale to insure that the Trailer towing is not recommended for Saving Fuel GVWR has not been exceeded. The this vehicle. weight on the front and rear of the Below are some suggestions which may vehicle should then be determined help you save fuel and lower the amount separately to be sure that the load is of harmful emissions released into the properly distributed over the front and atmosphere. rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show Vehicle Maintenance that the GAWR of either the front or rear Checks and operations should be carried axles has been exceeded but the total out in accordance with the Maintenance load is within the specified GVWR. If so, Plan. Refer to "Scheduled Servicing" in weight must be shifted from front to rear "Servicing And Maintenance" for further or rear to front as appropriate until the information. specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be Tires sure that the weight is distributed Check the tire pressures at least once equally. Stow all loose items securely every four weeks: if the pressure is too before driving. low, consumption levels increase as Improper weight distributions can have resistance to rolling is higher. an adverse effect on the way your vehicle Unnecessary Loads steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. Do not travel with an overloaded trunk. The weight of the vehicle and its arrangement greatly affect fuel Caution! consumption and stability. Electric Devices Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Use electrical systems only for the GVWR or the maximum front and rear amount of time needed. The rear window GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can defroster, additional headlights, break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. windshield wipers and heater blower fan Also overloading can shorten the life of your require a considerable amount of energy; vehicle. increasing the current uptake increases fuel consumption (by up to +25% when city driving).

165 Climate Control System Max. Speed Transporting Passengers Using the climate control system will Fuel consumption considerably increases increase consumption: use standard as speed increases. Maintain a constant Warning! ventilation when the temperature speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and outside permits. acceleration, which cost in terms of both fuel consumption and emissions. It is extremely dangerous to leave Devices for Aerodynamic Control children in a parked vehicle when the The use of non-certified devices for Acceleration temperature outside is very high. The heat aerodynamic control may adversely Accelerating violently severely affects inside the passenger compartment may affect air drag and consumption levels. consumption and emissions: acceleration have serious, or even fatal, consequences. should be gradual and should not exceed Driving Style Never travel in the trunk of the vehicle. In the maximum torque. the event of an accident, anyone inside the Starting Conditions Of Use trunk would be at greater risk of serious or Do not warm up the engine at low or high even fatal injury. revs when the vehicle is stationary; this Cold Starting Ensure that all the occupants of the causes the engine to warm up more Short trips and frequent cold starts will vehicle wear their seat belts correctly and

STARTING AND OPERATING slowly, thereby increasing fuel not allow the engine to reach optimum that any children are positioned correctly on consumption and emissions. It is operating temperature. This results in a the dedicated child restraint systems. therefore advisable to drive off significant increase in consumption immediately, slowly, avoiding high levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving) Transporting Animals speeds: by doing this the engine will and emissions. The intervention of the airbags may be warm up more quickly. Traffic And Road Conditions dangerous for an animal on the front Unnecessary Actions High fuel consumption is caused by heavy seat. It is therefore advised to arrange Avoid revving up when starting at traffic traffic, for instance when travelling in animals on the rear seat inside dedicated lights or before stopping the engine. This traffic with frequent use of low gears or cages restrained by the vehicle’s seat action is unnecessary and causes in cities with many traffic lights. Winding belts. increased fuel consumption and mountain roads and rough road surfaces Keep in mind that, in the event of a pollution. also adversely affect consumption. sudden braking or an accident, an inadequately restrained animal may be Gear Selection Stops In Traffic projected within the passenger Use a high gear when traffic and road During prolonged stops (e.g. railway compartment, risking injury to the animal conditions allow it. Using a low gear for crossings) turn off the engine. itself and the other occupants of the faster acceleration will increase fuel vehicle. consumption. Improper use of a high gear increases consumption, emissions and engine wear. 166 Exhaust Gas components which are broken, damaged, Romeo performs a "run-in" procedure for worn or have moved from their correct discs and pads directly at the factory. Exhaust emissions are very dangerous, fitting position. If any of these things and may be lethal. They contain carbon The use of carbon-ceramic material occur, contact your authorized dealer. monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas which brake discs guarantees braking features can cause fainting and poisoning if Open welding or loose connections may (better deceleration/pedal load ratio, inhaled. permit exhaust gas to enter the braking distances, fading resistance) passenger compartment. proportional to the dynamic features of To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, take the car in addition to considerably the following measures: Check the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil decreasing the unsprung component Do not keep the engine running in change operations. Replace the weight. closed spaces. components if necessary, contact your The materials used and the structural If, for some reason (e.g. transporting authorized dealer. features of the system could generate unusual noises which have absolutely no bulky loads), it is necessary to drive with Performance the trunk open, close all the windows and adverse effect on correct operation and This vehicle is equipped with an engine reliability of the braking system. run the climate control fan at maximum capable of delivering exceptionally fast Greater pressure may need to be applied speed. DO NOT activate air recirculation acceleration and speed: mode. to the brake pedal the first time to keep Peak power: 505 HP at 6500 rpm. the same braking capacities in presence Should it be necessary to stay in the of condensation or salt on the braking Peak torque: 443 ft-lbs at stationary vehicle with engine running, surfaces, for example after washing or if 2500–5000 rpm. adjust the ventilation/heating system the car is not used for a long time. and operate the fan in such a way that Top speed: 191 mph (307 km/h). outside air will enter the passenger Note: Given the high technological level compartment. Activate the maximum fan Acceleration from 0 to 60 mph (0 to of this system, any servicing on it must be speed. 100 km/h): 3.8 seconds. performed by your authorized dealer which exclusively has the skills needed Maintenance of the exhaust system For safe driving, it is essential, for the repair and maintenance provides the best protection against particularly during the first days of use, operations. to get to know the car by driving carefully leaks of carbon monoxide into the In case of intensive, high-performance and gradually discovering its passenger compartment. use of the car, have the efficiency of the performance. Should an unusual noise from the exhaust carbon-ceramic material braking system system or the presence of exhaust gas in Brakes inspected as shown on the Maintenance the passenger compartment be The car braking system may be available Plan at your authorized dealer. identified, or if the underbody or rear with four carbon-ceramic material brake section of the vehicle is damaged, have discs, one on each wheel. the entire exhaust system and bodywork areas checked to identify any In order to guarantee the maximum braking capacity for the first use, Alfa 167 Driving On Race Tracks Preheating The Carbon Ceramic Then brake three times from 124 mph Before driving on a track using a racing Material Brake Discs (If Equipped) to 18 mph (200 km/h to 30 km/h) with style, it is necessary to: The brake discs must be warmed up to deceleration equal to 1.1g (ABS make them fully efficient. Youare operation) with 30 second intervals Attend a race track driving course. advised to perform the following between brake applications; keep the car Check the liquid levels in the engine procedure to achieve optimal efficiency: at a speed comprised between 37 mph compartment. For more information, see and 62 mph (60 km/h and 100 km/h) and Brake nine times from 80 mph to the “Checking Levels” section in the do not brake for 5 minutes to allow the 18 mph (130 km/h to 30 km/h) with “Servicing And Maintenance” chapter. brakes to cool down. deceleration equal to 0.7g (the Have the car inspected at your longitudinal acceleration value is shown authorized dealer. on the instrument panel display by Remember that the car was not designed setting RACE mode and selecting the to be driven exclusively on the race track “Performance” page) with 20 second and that this use increases stress and intervals between brake applications; component wear. keep the car at a speed comprised between 37 mph and 62 mph (60 km/h STARTING AND OPERATING Note: Quadrifoglio front brakes are and 100 km/h) and do not brake for equipped with NAO type pads 4 minutes to allow the brakes to cool (Non-Asbestos Organic). These pads are down; NOT suitable for high thermal loads (for example track use). If you want to use vehicle on a track it is recommended to use the optional CCM Brakes (Carbon Ceramic Brake disc).

168 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb? HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS .....170 At times, a problem such as these may BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 170 interfere with your driving experience. FUSES ...... 175 TIRE SERVICE KIT ...... 181 The section on emergencies can help you JUMP STARTING ...... 184 to deal with critical situations REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .....187 independently. ENGINE OVERHEATING ...... 187 In an emergency, we recommend that you TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .188 call the phone number found in the TOW EYES ...... 189 Warranty Book. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Youmay also consider contacting an SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 190 authorized dealer. EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .190

169 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS When you must leave the vehicle to seek BULB REPLACEMENT assistance, the hazard warning flashers The Hazard Warning switch is located in will continue to operate even though the General Instructions the switch bank below the radio screen. ignition is cycled to OFF. Before replacing a bulb, check the Push the switch once to contacts for oxidation. turn the hazard warning flashers on. When the Replace blown bulbs with others of the switch is activated, all same type and power. directional turn signals After replacing a headlight bulb, will flash on and off to always check its alignment. warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a When a light is not working, check that second time to turn the hazard warning the corresponding fuse is intact before flashers off. changing the bulb. For the location of This is an emergency warning system and fuses, refer to “Fuses” in this chapter. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY it should not be used when the vehicle is 08016S0001EM1 Note: In some particular climate in motion. Use it when your vehicle is Hazard Warning Switch conditions, such as low temperature, disabled and is creating a safety hazard humidity, or after washing the car, a thin for other motorists. condensation layer may form on the Caution! internal surfaces of the front and rear headlights. This condensation will Prolonged use of the hazard warning disappear after switching on the flashers may discharge the vehicle’s battery. headlights.

170 Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): To remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.

171 Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type Power Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W Rear Fog lights H11 55 W Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W Glove compartment light W5W 4 W Trunk lid light W5W 5 W IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W

172 Replacing Exterior Bulbs 3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly counterclockwise, and then slide it off Note: Only replace the bulb when the Caution! engine is off. Also ensure that the engine the headlight body. is cold, to prevent the risk of burns. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Direction Indicators Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb To change the bulb of these lights, life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily proceed as follows: surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 1. Operating inside the engine compartment, remove the protective Replacing Interior Bulbs cover. Courtesy Mirror Light To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:

08026S0007EM 1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the Bulb/Connector lens, using a suitable tool. 4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the bulb holder. 5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is correctly inserted in the bulb holder.

08026S0023EM 6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in Protective Cover Location the housing on the headlight body and turn it clockwise, making sure that it is 2. Remove protective cover. locked correctly. 7. Install the protective cover. 08026S0008EM Front Light Cluster with Main Beam Sun Visor Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights 1 — Mirror Cover To replace the bulbs of the main beam 2 — Lens headlights, contact your authorized dealer.

08026S0006EM Protective Cover 173 2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is correctly fastened between the contacts. 3. Install the lens, inserting it firstly on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place. Glove Compartment Light To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

08026S0011EM 08026S0010EM 1. Open the glove compartment. Cover And Bulb Removal Direction Ceiling Light Indent 2. Remove the courtesy light assembly, 4. Install bulb, making sure that it is 2. Open protective cover up and remove using a suitable tool. correctly inserted fully. the bulb pulling out of the connector. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 5. Close the protective cover on the lens. 6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place. Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows: 1. Open the trunk, and remove the trunk lamp assembly using a suitable tool. 08026S0009EM 08026S0011EM Courtesy Lamp Indent Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 3. Open protective cover up and remove 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is the bulb pulling out of the connector. correctly inserted fully. 4. Close the protective cover on the lens.

174 5. Install trunk lamp in the correct FUSES position, inserting it firstly on one side, and then pressing on the other side until General Information it clicks into place. The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. Puddle Lights On Door Panel When a device does not work, you must To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: check the electrical circuit inside of the 1. Open the door and remove the puddle fuse for a break/melt. light assembly, using a suitable tool. Also, please be aware that using power outlets for extended periods of time with

08026S0011EM the engine off may result in vehicle Cover And Bulb Removal Direction battery discharge. 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is 1 correctly inserted fully. 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. 2 5. Install puddle light in the correct position, inserting it firstly on one side and then pressing on the other side until 08026S0012EM it clicks into place. 3 Puddle Light Indent 2. Open protective cover up and remove 0726067916 the bulb pulling out of the connector. Blade Fuses 1 — Electrical Circuit 2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit 3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- cuit

175 Grab the pliers from the upper tabs, press them, and extract the pliers pulling Warning! upwards. The pliers have two different ends, both of which are specifically designed to When replacing a blown fuse, always use remove the different types of fuses an appropriate replacement fuse with the present in the vehicle: same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity

08036S0002EM or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses J-CASE Fuse may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. 1 — Electrical Circuit Before replacing a fuse, make sure that 2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Cir- IN CASE OF EMERGENCY the ignition is off and that all the other cuit services are switched off and/or 3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- disengaged. cuit 08036S0005EM If the replaced fuse blows again, contact Fuse Extracting Pliers an authorized dealer. Fuse Extracting Pliers 1 — MINI fuse If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked 2 — J-CASE fuse to the fuse box. power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system After use, return the pliers to their proper blows, contact an authorized dealer. position by following the below procedures: Fuse Location Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs The fuses, which can be replaced by the and insert them into their housing. user, are grouped in two boxes below the passenger side foot board and inside the Push downward on the pliers into their trunk. housing until they click into place.

08036S0053EM Fuse Box

176 Control Unit Under Passenger Side 2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove Luggage Compartment Fuse Box Footboard the panel pulling downward. To access the fuses, proceed as follows: To access the fuses, proceed as follows: 1. Lift the luggage compartment cover. 1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on the passenger side, pulling to release the 2. Remove the control unit cover. two buttons.

08036S0011EM Release Hooks On Footboard

2 — Panel 08036S0014EM Control Unit 08036S0010EM The fuses are freely accessible on the control unit. The fuses are freely accessible on the Release Buttons On Footboard After replacing the fuse, make sure that control unit. 1 — Footboard panel and footboard are correctly locked. The number identifying the electrical component corresponding to each fuse is shown on the cover. After replacing a fuse, make sure that you have closed cover correctly.

177 Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0013EM Passenger Side Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Front power window (driver side) F33 25 Front power window (passenger side) F34 25 Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control F36 15 system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), Doors F38 20 unlock, Central lock

178 FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Windshield washer pump F43 20 Rear left power window F47 25 Rear right power window F48 25 Heater rear window coil F94 15

179 Luggage Compartment Fuse Box IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0015EM Luggage Compartment Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Tow hook module (TTM) F1 40 Hi-Fi system F8 30 KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5 I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10 KL15/a 12V Power outlet (R053) F22 20

180 TIRE SERVICE KIT An instruction pamphlet for reference To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as in prompt and correct use of the Tire follows: Description Service Kit, which must be then given to 1. Stop the vehicle in a position where If a tire is punctured, you can make an the personnel dealing with the you can repair the tire safely. Youshould emergency repair using the Tire Service sealant-treated tire. be as far as possible from the side of the Kit located in the trunk beneath the load A pair of protective gloves. road, and in a position that is not floor. Adaptors for inflating different dangerous for oncoming traffic. Activate elements. the hazard warning flashers, remove the safety triangle from the trunk, and place it at a suitable distance from the vehicle to make other drivers aware of your presence. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the tire service kit hoses to reach the valve stem and keep the tire 08066S0001EM repair kit flat on the ground. Tire Service Kit Location 3. Place the gear selector to PARK (P). The Tire Service Kit includes: 08066S0002EM Tire Service Kit Components 4. Apply the electric park brake and Sealant cartridge containing the cycle the engine OFF. sealing fluid. 1 — Sealant Cartridge 2 — Filler Tube Filler tube. 3 — Adhesive Label Adhesive label with the writing "Max. 4 — Air Compressor 50 mph (80 km/h)”, to be attached in a position easily visible to the driver (eg. on Note: The sealant is effective with the dashboard) after repairing the tire. external temperatures of between -40°F Air compressor, complete with (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C). The sealant pressure gauge and connectors. has an expiration date.

181 Inflation Procedure Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is Warning! harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side with plenty of water if there is any contact of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon enough off the road to avoid the danger of as possible, if there is any contact with being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. clothing. Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains vehicle under the following circumstances: latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, 08066S0004EM consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire If the puncture in the tire tread is Service Kit out of reach of children. If approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with 1 — Sealant Cartridge plenty of water and drink plenty of water. 2 — Filler Tube IN CASE OF EMERGENCY If the tire has any sidewall damage. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician If the tire has any damage from driving immediately. with extremely low tire pressure. 3. Make sure the power switch of the compressor is in the O (off) position. If the tire has any damage from driving on To use your Tire Service Kit, proceed as a flat tire. follows: 4. Insert the plug into the power outlet in If the wheel has any damage. the center console, then start the engine. 1. Apply the electric park brake. If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. 2. Insert the sealant cartridge containing Keep Tire Service Kit away from open the sealing fluid in the proper flames or heat sources. compressor holder, pushing down hard. Unscrew the tire valve cap, take out the A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in filler tube and tighten the fitting on the a collision or hard stop could endanger the tire valve. occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your

passengers, and others around you. 08066S0006EM Center Console Power Outlet 5. Start the compressor by placing the power switch in the I (on) position. 182 6. Inflate the tire to the pressure 8. If you still cannot obtain a pressure of 12. Apply the adhesive label from the indicated on the tire placard, located on at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within sealant bottle where it can be easily seen the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge 15 minutes of turning the compressor on, by the driver as a reminder that the tire of the driver’s side door. Refer to “Tires” do not drive the vehicle, and contact your has been treated with a Tire Service Kit, in “Servicing And Maintenance” for more authorized dealer. as well as not to exceed the speed information. In order to obtain a more restriction for the treated tire. precise reading, check the pressure value 9. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles on pressure gauge with the compressor (8 km), stop, apply the electric park Warning! off. brake, and recheck the tire pressure. 10. If the pressure is less than 26 psi (1.8 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle, and Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker see your authorized dealer. to the padded area on the steering wheel. Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the 11. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi padded area on the steering wheel is (1.8 bar) is detected, restore the correct dangerous because the air bag may not pressure (with engine running and operate (deploy) normally resulting in electric park brake applied), and drive serious injury. In addition, do not adhere the immediately with great care to your sticker to areas where warning lights or the authorized dealer. speedometer cannot be viewed.

08066S0005EM Air Compressor Warning! 5 — Power Switch 6 — Pressure Gauge Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do 7. If the pressure is not at least 26.1 psi not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is (1.8 bar) after 15 minutes, disengage the repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this compressor from the valve and power warning can result in injuries that are serious outlet. Then, move the vehicle forwards or fatal to you, your passengers, and others approximately five tire turns in order to around you. Have the tire checked as soon as distribute the sealant inside the tire possible at your authorized dealer. evenly, and then repeat the inflation operation.

183 Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure Sealant Cartridge Replacement JUMP STARTING The compressor can also be used to Note: Only use original cartridges, which If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it check and, if necessary, restore the tire can be purchased at an authorized dealer. can be jump started using a set of jumper pressure. Proceed as follows: cables and a battery in another vehicle, or Proceed as follows: by using a portable battery booster pack. 1. Remove the sealant cartridge by Jump starting can be dangerous if done 1. Release the quick connector and pushing the release button located on the improperly, so please follow the connect it directly to the valve of the tire side of the compressor. procedures in this section carefully. to be inflated. 2. Insert the new sealant cartridge by Note: When using a portable battery 2. Push the air release button. pushing downward firmly. booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

Warning! IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Caution! 08066S0008EM 08066S0009EM Air Compressor Components Sealant Cartridge Replacement Do not use a portable battery booster pack 7— Air Release Button 1 — Sealant Cartridge or any other booster source with a system 8— Quick Connector 9 — Release Button voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to 9— Release Button the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

184 Remote Battery Connection Posts Jump Starting The negative terminal (-) is positioned next to the passenger side hood lock. Warning!

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

08076S0004EM Caution! Protective Flap Opening

Failure to follow these procedures could 08076S0006EM result in damage to the charging system of Remote Post Location the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

Warning! Preparation For Jump Starting: 1. Firmly apply the park brake, and cycle the ignition to OFF. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. 2. Turn off all electrical features in the The resulting electrical spark could cause vehicle. the battery to explode and could result in serious injury. Only use the specific ground 08076S0005EM 3. If using another vehicle to jump start Remote Post Location point, do not use any other exposed metal the battery, park the vehicle within the parts. To carry out the operation, you need to jumper cables reach, apply the park brake have the correct cables to connect to the and make sure the ignition is OFF. The positive post (+) can be accessed by battery of another vehicle or a portable lifting the protective flap. battery booster pack to the remote posts of the discharged battery. Usually, these Warning! cables have terminals at the ends and are identified by different sheath colors (red = positive, black = negative). Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. 185 Cable Connection 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a Proceed as follows to perform a jump Caution! starting procedure: few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the using a portable battery booster pack, Accessories plugged into the vehicle power jumper cable to the positive (+) post of before starting the vehicle, wait a few outlets draw power from the vehicle’s the vehicle with the discharged battery. seconds after completing the connection. battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long 2. Connect the opposite end of the Cable Disconnection enough without engine operation, the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive Once the engine is started, remove the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently (+) post of the booster battery. connection cables in reverse sequence, to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the as described below: jumper cable to the negative (-) post of 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper the booster battery. Bump Starting cable from the remote negative (-) post

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 4. Connect the opposite end of the of the discharged vehicle. Never jump start the engine by pushing, negative (-) jumper cable to the remote towing or coasting downhill. 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the negative (-) post of the discharged Note: Youcannot start a vehicle with an jumper cable from the negative (-) post of vehicle. automatic transmission by pushing it. the booster battery.

Warning! 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the The resulting electrical spark could cause jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the battery to explode and could result in the vehicle with the discharged battery. serious injury. Only use the specific ground If frequent jump starting is required to point, do not use any other exposed metal start your vehicle, you should have the parts. battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

186 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ENGINE OVERHEATING Youcan also turn the temperature Refueling in an emergency is described in control to maximum heat, the mode Engine overheating may occur in control to floor and the blower control to "Refueling The Vehicle" in "Starting And situations of extreme environmental Operating". high. This allows the heater core to act temperatures, frequent engine as a supplement to the radiator and aids stops/starts, or driving in heavy traffic. If in removing heat from the engine cooling the engine becomes overheated, the system. Engine TemperatureWarning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate along with a dedicated message. Refer to Warning! "Warning Lights And Messages" in the "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" for more information. Youor others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from In any of the following situations, you can your radiator. If you see or hear steam reduce the potential for overheating by coming from under the hood, do not open the taking the appropriate action. hood until the radiator has had time to cool. On the highways — slow down. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is In city traffic — while stopped, place hot. the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. Caution! Note: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition: Driving with a hot cooling system could If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle it off. The A/C system adds heat to the the vehicle with the air conditioner turned engine cooling system and turning the off until the pointer drops back into the A/C off can help remove this heat. normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service.

187 If Steam Is Coming From The Engine TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE The operators of the assistance vehicle Compartment must be informed of your vehicle's This section describes procedures for Do not go near the front of the vehicle. minimum required height from the towing a disabled vehicle using a ground, in order to avoid contact Stop the engine. Wait until the steam commercial towing service. dissipates. Then, open the hood and start between the ends of the bumpers and the the engine. equipment of the breakdown truck. If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is Caution! The following image illustrates the front Escaping and rear attachment corners of the vehicle, which are to be taken into Open the hood and idle the engine until it The vehicle should be transported with all cools. consideration when loading your vehicle four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed onto the assistance vehicle. of a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid Note: towing with only the front (or rear) wheels If the cooling fan does not operate lifted. When towing with only the front (or while the engine is running, the engine rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging the body, it could damage the transmission. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY temperature will increase. Stop the engine and contact an authorized dealer. Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. If the engine continues to overheat or frequently overheats, have the cooling When securing the vehicle to a flatbed system inspected. The engine could be truck, do not attach to front or rear seriously damaged unless repairs are suspension components. Damage to your made. Contact an authorized dealer. vehicle may result from improper towing. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is 08126S0001EM released, and remain released, while being Front And Rear Loading Angles towed. Damage from improper towing is not Loading covered under the New Vehicle Limited Angles Warranty. A — Front Loading Angle 12.045° B — Rear Loading Angle 11.830°

188 Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models TOW EYES It is recommended to tow the vehicle If the vehicle has been in an accident or with all four wheels OFF the ground on has broken down, a tow eye is provided in the flatbed of a roadside assistance the tools container located inside the vehicle. trunk for vehicle towing. Two locations on the front bumper are available for Tow Caution! Eye installation. Towing is meant only for short distances on a paved road surface. Proceed as follows to use the tow eye: Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. 1. Unhook the cap on the left or right 08136S0002EM side of the front bumper, pushing on the Work Angle Of Tow Cable When securing the vehicle to a flat bed upper part. truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. Warning! Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow towed. eyes. Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed is not available, the vehicle must be towed Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. with the rear wheels lifted from the Tow straps may break or become disengaged, causing serious injury or death. ground using a trailer or special 08136S0001EM equipment allowing lifting of the rear Front Tow Eye Cap Locations Failure to follow proper tow eye usage wheels. may cause components to break resulting in 2. Remove the tow eye from its housing serious injury or death. in the trunk and carefully clean the threaded housing on the vehicle before using it. 3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place (about 11 turns). Note: The largest work angle of a tow cable to fix on the tow hook must not exceed 15°. 189 ENHANCED ACCIDENT EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) Caution! RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Event This vehicle is equipped with an Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Enhanced Accident Response System. of an EDR is to record data that will The tow eye must be used exclusively for Please refer to “Occupant Restraint assist in understanding how a vehicle’s roadside assistance operations. Only use systems performed under certain crash the tow eye with an appropriate device in Systems” in “Safety” for further accordance with the highway code (a rigid information on the Enhanced Accident or near crash-like situations, such as an bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a Response System (EARS) function. air bag deployment or hitting a road short distance to the nearest service obstacle. location. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow Systems” in “Safety” for further vehicles off the road or where there are information on the Event Data Recorder obstacles. (EDR).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY In compliance with the above conditions, towing with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not followed. When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.

190 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing permits the SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 192 performance of the vehicle to be ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 196 maintained over time, as well as limited BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 199 running costs and safeguarding the DEALER SERVICE ...... 200 efficiency of the safety systems. RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 207 This chapter explains how. TIRES ...... 207 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . .222 STORING THE VEHICLE ...... 223 BODYWORK...... 224 INTERIORS ...... 226

191 SCHEDULED SERVICING Periodic Checks The following checks must be carried out more often than indicated in the Correct servicing is crucial for Every month or every 600 miles Scheduled Servicing Plan: guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle ( 1,000 km) or before long trips check under the best conditions. and, if necessary, top off: Check cleanliness of hood and trunk For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned locks, cleanliness and lubrication of Engine coolant level. a series of checks and services for your linkage. vehicle at fixed intervals based on Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see an Visually inspect conditions of: engine, distance and time, as described in the authorized dealer as soon as possible). transmission, pipes and hoses Scheduled Servicing Plan. Windshield washer fluid level. (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber Before each service, it is always elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.). necessary to carefully follow the Tire inflation pressure and condition. Check battery charge and battery fluid instructions in the Scheduled Servicing Operation of lighting system level (electrolyte). Plan (e.g. periodically check level of (headlights, direction indicators, hazard fluids, tire pressure, etc.). warning lights, etc.). Visually inspect conditions of the Scheduled Servicing is offered by an accessory drive belts. authorized dealer according to a set time Operation of windshield schedule. If, during each operation, in washing/wiping system and Check and, if necessary, change engine addition to the ones scheduled, the need positioning/wear of wiper blades. oil and replace oil filter.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE arises for further replacements or Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check and Check and, if necessary, replace cabin repairs, these may be carried out with the top off if required: air filter. owner’s explicit consent only. Engine oil level. Check and, if necessary, replace air Note: Scheduled Servicing intervals are cleaner. required by the Manufacturer. Failure to Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle have them carried out may invalidate the Severe Duty All Models If the vehicle is used under one of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles following conditions: Youare advised to inform your (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a authorized dealer of any small operating Dusty roads. dusty and off-road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only irregularities without waiting for the next Short, repeated journeys less than very low engine RPM’s. This type of service. 4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. temperatures. Engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity. In the event of a long period of inactivity. 192 Maintenance Plan (2.9 V6 Engine) 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expiration ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● date. Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, trunk lid, passenger ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels.(1) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool). ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), ●●●●●●● rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.). Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade. ●●●●●●●● Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and ●●●●●●●● adjust nozzles, if necessary.

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact.

193 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks, ●●●●●●● cleanliness and lubrication of linkage. Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● pads and operation of pad wear indicators. Visually inspect the brake discs surface and edge. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Brake pads/brake discs replacement. (2) Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the ●●● ●●● ●●● ●●●

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE accessory drive belt(s). Change engine coolant ● Change engine oil and replace oil filter. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Replace accessory drive belt/s. (3) Replace air cleaner cartridge (4) ●●●●●●●

(2) The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message on the instrument panel. After each discs replacement, reset the warning light using the diagnostic socket. (3) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,00 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years. (4) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).

194 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240

Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped). ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Change the brake fluid. (5) Replace the cabin air filter (6) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o Spark plug replacement.* ●●●●●

(5) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. (6) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). * The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearlyintervals do not apply. (o) Recommended operations (●) Mandatory operations

Warning!

Youcan be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

195 ENGINE COMPARTMENT Checking Levels 2.9L V6 engine, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

09026S0001EM 1 – Engine Oil Dipstick 4 – Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 2 – Engine Oil Filler 5 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover 3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap

196 Engine Oil Note: Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten to proper torque whenever it is The engine oil level can be seen on the Warning! instrument cluster display every time the removed to add oil to engine. Never run engine is started, or on the Information the engine with cap removed this could and Entertainment system display by cause oil to leak from engine. If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for activating on the main menu (MENU Manual oil level checking procedure the engine to cool down before loosening the button) the following functions in filler cap, particularly for vehicles with Check that the oil level is between the sequence: “Apps”; “My Car” and “Oil aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk MIN and MAX marks on dipstick, clean it Level”. of burns! with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it. Check on the display using the 6 notches Extract the dipstick again and check that that the oil level is between the MIN and the level is between the MIN and MAX Caution! MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches marks. MAX level. If the oil level is close to or below the MIN Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark, add oil gradually through the filler, On Display mark. (refer to “Top-Up And Oil Level Indication If a engine oil top-off is needed, in order to ensure the correct indication of the oil If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last Update On Display” in this section) notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up, considering that each notch shown on the level on the display, leave the vehicle on go to your authorized dealer as soon as display corresponds to approximately flat ground with the engine running for possible to have the oil in excess removed. 8.8floz(250ml). approximately 5 minutes (temperature higher than 176°F (80°C)) and shut the Do not add oil with specifications The oil level can also be checked different from those of the oil already in the manually. engine off then proceed with the process below: engine. Wait for five minutes, turn the ignition Used engine oil and oil filters contain Caution! substances which are harmful to the to the ON mode without starting the environment. To change the oil and filters, engine and wait for a few seconds. we advise you to contact your authorized Make sure not to add too much oil when Note: If you have added the specified dealer. topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess amount of oil and the indicator is not may damage the engine. Have the vehicle checked. Never exceed the MAX level when reading “Full”, please contact you topping off engine oil. It is advisable to authorized dealer. check the oil level in intermediate steps using the oil dipstick. The oil level is not refreshed immediately on the display after topping off. Consequently, wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the display and follow the procedure below. 197 Engine Coolant Fluid Useful Advice For Extending The Life Note: After the battery is disconnected, If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of Of YourBattery the steering must be initialized. The warning light on the instrument panel reservoir and add the fluid described in To avoid draining your battery and make switches on to indicate this. To carry out the "Technical Specifications" chapter. it last longer, observe the following this procedure, simply turn the steering instructions: Washer Fluid For Windshield/ wheel all the way from one end to the Headlights When you park the car, ensure that the other, and then turn it back to the central The windshield and headlights washer doors and trunk are closed properly to position. fluid reservoir has a telescopic filler. prevent any lights from remaining on Battery If the level is too low, remove reservoir inside the passenger's compartment. cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid The battery does not require the Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, electrolyte to be topped up with distilled described in the "Technical hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on Specifications" chapter. water. A periodic check carried out at an for a long time when the engine is not authorized dealer, however, is necessary Note: The headlight washing system will running. to check efficiency. not work if the liquid level is low (as indicated by the symbol on the Before performing any operation on Follow the battery manufacturer's instrument cluster display). The the electrical system, disconnect the instructions for maintenance. windshield washer will keep working. On negative battery cable. Replacing The Battery vehicles equipped with headlight If you wish to install electrical

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE If necessary, replace the battery with washers, if equipped, there is a reference accessories after purchasing the car that another original battery with the same notch on the dipstick: ONLYthe require permanent electrical supply (e.g. specifications. Follow the battery windshield/rear window washer operates alarm, etc.), or accessories which manufacturer’s instructions for with the level below this reference. influence the electrical supply maintenance. Brake Fluid requirements, contact your authorized dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate Check that the fluid is at the maximum the overall electrical consumption. level. If the fluid level in the tank is low, Warning! contact your authorized dealer to have Caution! the system checked. Battery acid is a corrosive solution and Automatic Transmission Activation can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or System Oil If the charge level remains under 50% for a clothing. Do not lean over a battery when long time, the battery may be damaged by attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or The transmission control oil level should sulphation, reducing its capacity and on skin, flush the area immediately with only be checked at your authorized dealer. efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump also more prone to the risk of freezing (at Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C). further information. 198 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. BATTERY RECHARGING Keep flame or sparks away from the Important Notes battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. Warning! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead Never charge or recharge a frozen compounds. Wash hands after handling. battery: it may explode because of the nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals.

Note: It will not be possible to open the At all times while charging or recharging 09036S0001EM trunk with a key or by pressing the button the battery, make sure that any sparks or Battery Access Panel in the passenger compartment when the open flames are kept sufficiently far away battery is disconnected. So, always from the battery. Remove the protective cover and position the manual trunk opening strap connect the positive cable terminal of the charger (usually red) to the positive on the trunk lock before disconnecting Note: the battery. The procedure is described in terminal (+) of the battery. the "Storing The Vehicle" paragraph in Before using the charging device, Connect the negative terminal of the this chapter. always make sure that it is appropriate charger (usually black) to nut next to the for the installed battery, with constant negative terminal (-) of the battery. voltage (below 14.8 V) and low amperage (maximum 15 A). Recharge the battery in a well ventilated environment. Before using any devices to charge or to maintain the charge of the battery, carefully follow the instructions provided with the device in order to properly and safely connect it to the car battery. Youcan recharge the battery without 09036S0002EM Battery disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's electrical system. 1 — Protective Cover To reach the battery, remove the 2 — Negative Post (Nut) access panel inside the trunk. 199 The vehicle is equipped with an IBS DEALER SERVICE Changing The Engine Oil (Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is able The following pages contain instructions See the "Maintenance Plan" for the to measure the charge and discharge on the required maintenance from the correct servicing intervals. voltage and calculate the charge level technical personnel who designed the Choice Of Engine Oil Type and the general condition of the battery. vehicle. The sensor is placed next to the negative To ensure optimal performance and In addition to these specific maintenance terminal (-) of the battery. maximum protection in all operating instructions specified for routine For a correct charge/discharge conditions, it is advisable to use solely scheduled servicing, there are other certified engine oils (see description in procedure, the charge voltage must go components which may require periodic through the IBS sensor. "Fluid And Lubricants" in the "Technical maintenance or replacement over the Specifications" chapter). 1. Turn the charger on and follow the vehicle’s life cycle. Additives For Engine Oil instructions on the user's manual to Engine Oil completely recharge the battery. It is strongly recommended not to use Engine Oil Level Check additives (other than leak detection dyes) 2. When the battery is charged, turn the To ensure correct engine lubrication, the with the engine oil. charger off before disconnecting it from oil must always be kept at the prescribed The engine oil is a product designed the battery. level (see "Engine Compartment" in this specially for the vehicle and its 3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of chapter). performance may be deteriorated

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the battery charger and then the red Check the oil level at regular intervals, for through the use of further additives. cable terminal. example every 1864 miles (3000 km). Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters It must be checked once full operating 4. Refit the protective cover of the For the disposal of the engine oil and temperature is reached. positive terminal of the battery and the filters, contact the appropriate body to access cover to the battery The vehicle must also be parked on as determine local regulations. compartment. level a surface as possible. Note: Used engine oil disposed of The engine oil level can be checked using Note: If a "quick-type" battery charger is incorrectly may seriously harm the the Information and Entertainment used with the battery fitted on the environment. system. To access the function, activate vehicle, before connecting it disconnect the main menu (MENU button) and select both cables of the battery itself. Do not the following options in sequence: use a "quick-type" battery charger to “Applications”; “My Car”; “Oil level”. provide the starting voltage.

200 Engine Oil Filter Replace The Cabin Air Filter Thoroughly clean the components, eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. Replacing The Engine Oil Filter See the "Maintenance Plan" for the correct servicing intervals. For cleaner After lubricating, eliminate excess oil and The engine oil filter must be replaced replacement, contact an authorized grease. Also pay particular attention to each time the engine oil is changed. It is dealer. the hood closing devices, to ensure advised to replace it with a genuine spare correct operation. During operations on part, specifically designed for this the hood, to be carried out with the vehicle. Warning! engine cold, also remember to check, Air Filter clean and lubricate the locking, release and safety devices. Replacing The Air Cleaner Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for Lubricate the external lock barrels twice See the "Maintenance Plan" for the your air conditioning system. Some a year. Apply a small amount of correct servicing intervals. It is advised to unapproved refrigerants are flammable and high-quality lubricant directly into the replace it with a genuine spare part, can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved lock barrel. specifically designed for this vehicle. refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer If necessary, contact your authorized Air Conditioning System Maintenance to Warranty Information Book, located in dealer as soon as possible. To ensure the best possible performance, your owner’s information kit, for further Windshield Wiper the air conditioning system must be warranty information. Periodically clean the windshield and rear checked and undergo maintenance at an window and rubber profile of the authorized dealer at the beginning of the Lubricating Moving Parts Of The windshield wiper blades, using a sponge summer. Bodywork or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive Ensure that the locks and bodywork detergent. This eliminates the salt or Caution! junction points, including components impurities accumulated when driving. such as the seat guides, door hinges (and Prolonged operation of the windshield rollers), trunk and hood are periodically window wipers with dry glass may cause Do not use chemicals to clean the air lubricated with lithium-based grease to the deterioration of the blades, in conditioning system, since the internal ensure correct, silent operation and to components may be damaged. This kind of addition to abrasion of the surface of the damage is not covered by warranty. protect them from rust and wear. glass. To eliminate the impurities on the dry glass, always operate the windshield washers.

201 In the event of very low outdoor Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades Function Deactivation temperatures, below 0°F (-17.8°C) , ("Service Position" Function) The function is deactivated if: ensure that the movement of the rubber The "service position" function allows the part in contact with the glass is not driver to replace the windshield wiper More than two minutes passes before obstructed. Use a suitable deicing blades more easily. It is also cycling the ignition to the STOP position product to release it if required. recommended to activate this function after having raised the lever and putting Avoid using the windshield wipers to when it is snowing and to make it easier the wipers into service position. remove frost or ice. to remove any dirt deposits in the area The ignition is cycled to the ON Also avoid contact of the rubber profile where the blades are normally position and the windshield wiper control of the blades with petroleum derivatives positioned, when washing. is used. such as engine oil, gas, etc. Activation Of The Function If, after using the function, the ignition is To activate this function, disable the set back to ON with the blades in a windshield wiper before setting the position other than rest position (at the Warning! ignition device to STOP. base of the windshield), they will only return to rest position following a This function can only be activated within command given using the stalk (stalk Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is two minutes of cycling the ignition to upwards, into unstable position) or when a serious hazard, because visibility is STOP. a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded. reduced in bad weather conditions. To activate this function, move the lever SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE upward for at least three seconds. Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades Note: The life of the windshield wiper Proceed as follows: blades varies according to the usage frequency. In any case, it is advised to 1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab of the replace the blades approximately once a attachment spring and remove the blade year. When the blades are worn, noise, from the arm. marks on the glass or streaks of water may be noticed. In the presence of these conditions, clean the windshield wiper blades or, if necessary, replace them.

0903142761US Windshield Wiper Stalk

09046S0002EM Wiper Release Tab 202 2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in Exhaust System To minimize the risk of damaging the the dedicated housing in the arm and catalytic converter, proceed as follows: Adequate maintenance of the engine checking that it is locked. exhaust system represents the best Do not stop the engine or deactivate 3. Lower the wiper arm onto the protection against leaks of carbon the ignition with gear engaged and windshield. monoxide into the passenger vehicle in motion. compartment. Note: Do not operate the windshield Do not attempt to start the engine by wiper with the blades lifted from the If an unusual noise from the exhaust or bump starting. windshield. the presence of smoke in the passenger compartment is identified, or if the Do not persist in using the vehicle if Windshield Washer underbody or rear section of the vehicle idling is very irregular or the operating The window washer nozzles are fixed. If have been damaged, have the entire conditions are very notably irregular. there is no jet of fluid, first check that exhaust system and adjoining bodywork there is fluid in the reservoir (see areas checked at your authorized dealer Warning! paragraph “Engine Compartment” in this to identify any components which are chapter). broken, damaged, worn or have moved from their correct fitting position. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They Open welding or loose connections may contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is permit exhaust gas to enter the colorless and odorless. Breathing it can passenger compartment. make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. Have the exhaust system checked every time the vehicle is raised. Replace the A hot exhaust system can start a fire if components where necessary (for these you park over materials that can burn. Such operations, contact an authorized materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do dealer). not park or operate your vehicle in areas In normal operating conditions, the where your exhaust system can contact

09046S0003EM catalytic converter does not require anything that can burn. Windshield Washers maintenance. To ensure that it operates correctly, however, and prevent it from 1 — Washer Nozzles getting damaged, it is extremely important that the engine operates Then, check that the nozzle holes are not perfectly. clogged; use a needle to unblock them if necessary.

203 Cooling System Check the engine coolant and intercooler coolant level every oil change or before Warning! long trips. Warning! If there are impurities in the engine coolant, the system must be drained, Do not open hot engine cooling system. Youor others can be badly burned by hot flushed and refilled: contact an Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from authorized dealer. the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated your radiator. If you see or hear steam Check the front part of the condenser to coming from under the hood, do not open the engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in hood until the radiator has had time to cool. check for any build-up of insects, leaves the cooling system. To prevent scalding or Never open a cooling system pressure cap or other debris. Should it be dirty, clean it injury, do not remove the pressure cap while when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. by spraying delicately with water. the system is hot or under pressure. Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry Check the hoses of the engine/ Do not use a pressure cap other than the away from the radiator cooling fan when the intercooler cooling system to ensure that one specified for your vehicle. Personal hood is raised. The fan starts automatically the rubber has not deteriorated and that injury or engine damage may result. and may start at any time, whether the there are no cracks, tears, cuts or engine is running or not. obstructions in the expansion tank side Note: Before removing the coolant and radiator side connectors. Should When working near the radiator cooling reservoir cap, wait for the system to cool there be any doubt regarding leaks from fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn down.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is the system (e.g. if frequent top ups are temperature controlled and can start at any required), have the seal checked at an Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The time the ignition is in the ON mode. authorized dealer. Engine/Intercooler Coolant With the engine off and at normal If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, Coolant Check operating temperature, check that the have cleaning and flushing carried out at Yourvehicle has two cooling systems and cooling system radiator cap is closed an authorized dealer. they both need to be checked to ensure properly. See the "Maintenance Plan" for the they are at proper fill levels. Refer to the correct servicing intervals. “Engine Compartment” section for the locations.

204 Note: With engine and system cold, do not top up with coolant beyond the For topping up, use a fluid with the Warning! maximum level indicated on the same characteristics as those indicated reservoir in the engine compartment. in the "Fluids And Lubricants" table (see "Technical Specifications" chapter). Never add coolant with the engine hot or overheated. Braking System Do not use pure water, alcohol-based Do not attempt to cool an overheated In order to guarantee the efficiency of coolants, corrosions inhibitors or engine by loosening or removing the cap. the braking system, periodically check its additional anti-rust products because The heat causes a considerable increase in components; for this operation, contact they may be incompatible with the pressure in the cooling system. an authorized dealer. engine coolant and cause the clogging of See the "Maintenance Plan" for the the radiator. The use of propylene To prevent damage to the engine, only use the engine cooling circuit caps provided. correct servicing intervals. glycol-based coolant is also not recommended. Note: Driving with your foot resting on Disposal Of Used Coolant the brake pedal may compromise its Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is efficiency, increasing the risk of To prevent loss of engine coolant, make subject to legal requirements: contact accidents. When driving, never keep your sure that the expansion tank cap is the appropriate body to determine local foot on the brake pedal and don’t put closed. If it is open, screw it completely regulations. unnecessary strain on it to prevent the until you reach/hear the click. brakes from overheating: excess pad Periodically check the cap and clean it Note: wear may cause damage to the braking from any foreign bodies that may have To prevent the fluid from being system. deposited on the external surface. ingested by children or animals, do not When an insufficient oil level is keep it in open containers or pour it on detected, contact an authorized dealer the ground. If ingested, contact a doctor to have the system checked. immediately. Eliminate any traces of fluid from the ground immediately. Always keep the cap of the brake fluid reservoir (in the engine When the vehicle stops after a short compartment) completely closed. trip, steam may be seen coming out from front of the hood. This is a normal phenomenon which is due to the presence of rain, snow or a lot of moisture on the surface of the radiator.

205 Automatic Transmission Replacing The Battery Warning! Use only a transmission oil with the same If necessary, replace the battery with characteristics as those indicated in the another battery with the same "Fluids and Lubricants" table (see specifications. It is advised to contact an Use only manufacturer's recommended "Technical Specifications" chapter). authorized dealer for replacement. brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further Special Additives Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for maintenance. information. Using the wrong type of brake Do not use any type of additive with the fluid can severely damage your brake automatic transmission oil. The Note: It will not be possible to open the system and/or impair its performance. The trunk with a key or by pressing the button proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is automatic transmission oil is a product designed specially for this vehicle and its in the passenger compartment when the also identified on the original factory battery is disconnected. So, always installed hydraulic master cylinder performance may be compromised reservoir. through the use of further additives. position the manual trunk opening strap on the trunk lock before disconnecting To avoid contamination from foreign the battery. The procedure is described in matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid Caution! the "Storing The Vehicle" section in this or fluid that has been in a tightly closed chapter. container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake Do not use chemical flushes in your fluid in a open container absorbs moisture transmission as the chemicals can damage SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. your transmission components. Such This may cause it to boil unexpectedly damage is not covered by the New Vehicle during hard or prolonged braking, resulting Limited Warranty. in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. Frequency Of Oil Changes Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine In normal vehicle operating conditions, it parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. is not necessary to change the Brake fluid can also damage painted and transmission oil. vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. Caution! Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an partial or complete brake failure. This could authorized dealer immediately. Severe result in a collision. transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. 206 RAISING THE VEHICLE TIRES Note: If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an Tire Safety Information P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is authorized dealer which is equipped with based on U.S. design standards. Tire safety information will cover aspects shop jacks or jack arms. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded of the following information: Tire into the sidewall preceding the size The vehicle lifting points are marked on Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, the side skirts with the symbols. designation. Example: P215/ Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire 65R15 95H. Pressures, and Tire Loading. European — Metric tire sizing is Tire Markings based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. LT(Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size

09056S0001EM designation for LT-Metric tires is the Vehicle Lift Point Locations same as for P-Metric tires except for the 0601085395US letters “LT” that are molded into the Tire Markings sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum Safety Standards Load Temporary spare tires are designed 5 — Maximum for temporary emergency use only. Code (TIN) Temporary high pressure compact spare 2 — Size Pressure tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded Designation 6 — Treadwear, into the sidewall preceding the size 3 — Service Traction and designation. Example: T145/ Description Temperature 80D18 103M. Grades High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

207 Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE R = Construction code "R" means radial construction, or "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

208 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN) sidewalls will have the full TIN, including is not found on the outboard side, then the date code, located on the white you will find it on the inboard side of the The TIN may be found on one or both sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN tire. sides of the tire; however, the date code on the outboard side of black sidewall may only be on one side. Tires with white tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week

209 EXAMPLE: 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for Cold Tire Inflation Pressure a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Maximum Inflation Pressure pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, Tire Placard the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

210 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading Note: The proper cold tire inflation The vehicle maximum load on the tire pressure is listed on the driver’s side must not exceed the load carrying B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You side door. will not exceed the tire's load carrying Check the inflation pressure of each tire, capacity if you adhere to the loading including the spare tire (if equipped), at conditions, tire size, and cold tire least monthly and inflate to the inflation pressures specified on the Tire recommended pressure for your vehicle. and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And GUID-054900418-high.tif Operating” section of this manual. Tire And Loading Information Placard Note: Under a maximum loaded vehicle This placard tells you important condition, gross axle weight ratings information about the: (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles 1. Number of people that can be carried must not be exceeded. For further in the vehicle. information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. 0806115150US 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) To determine the maximum loading 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the conditions of your vehicle, locate the front, rear, and spare tires. statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

0806115151US Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

211 Steps For Determining Correct Load (5) Determine the combined weight Metric Example For Load Limit Limit— of luggage and cargo being loaded on For example, if “XXX” amount equals (1) Locate the statement “The the vehicle. That weight may not 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg safely exceed the available cargo and passengers in your vehicle, the amount of combined weight of occupants and available cargo and luggage load capacity cargo should never exceed XXX kg or luggage load capacity calculated in is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. Step 4. shown in step 4. (2) Determine the combined weight (6) If your vehicle will be towing a Note: trailer, load from your trailer will be of the driver and passengers that will If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, be riding in your vehicle. transferred to your vehicle. Consult load from your trailer will be transferred (3) Subtract the combined weight of this manual to determine how this to your vehicle. The following table the driver and passengers from reduces the available cargo and shows examples on how to calculate luggage load capacity of your vehicle. total load, cargo/luggage, and towing XXX kg or XXX lbs. capacities of your vehicle with varying (4) The resulting figure equals the seating configurations and number and available amount of cargo and size of occupants. This table is for luggage load capacity. For example, illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and carry capacity of your vehicle. there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and available cargo and luggage load cargo should never exceed 865 lbs capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (392 kg). (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

212 GUID-054900419-high.tif

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

213 Tires — General Information Unequal tire pressures can cause steering Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Tire Pressure problems. Youcould lose control of your Proper tire inflation contributes to a vehicle. comfortable ride. Over-inflation Proper tire inflation pressure is essential Unequal tire pressures from one side of produces a jarring and uncomfortable to the safe and satisfactory operation of the vehicle to the other can cause the ride. your vehicle. Four primary areas are vehicle to drift to the right or left. Tire Inflation Pressures affected by improper tire pressure: Always drive with each tire inflated to the Safety and Vehicle Stability recommended cold tire inflation pressure. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear Economy edge of the driver's side door. Both under-inflation and over-inflation Tread Wear affect the stability of the vehicle and can At least once a month: Ride Comfort produce a feeling of sluggish response or Check and adjust tire pressure with a over responsiveness in the steering. good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Safety Do not make a visual judgement when Note: determining proper inflation. Tires may Unequal tire pressures from side to look properly inflated even when they are Warning! side may cause erratic and under-inflated. unpredictable steering response.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or Improperly inflated tires are dangerous Unequal tire pressure from side to visible damage. and can cause collisions. side may cause the vehicle to drift left or Underinflation increases tire flexing and right. Caution! can result in overheating and tire failure. Fuel Economy Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to Underinflated tires will increase tire cushion shock. Objects on the road and rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel After inspecting or adjusting the tire chuckholes can cause damage that result in consumption. pressure, always reinstall the valve stem tire failure. cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from Tread Wear entering the valve stem, which could Overinflated or underinflated tires can damage the valve stem. affect vehicle handling and can fail Improper cold tire inflation pressures can suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

214 Inflation pressures specified on the Tire Pressures For High Speed Recommended Cold Tire Inflation placard are always “cold tire inflation Operation Pressures pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is For vehicle speeds below 100 mph defined as the tire pressure after the The manufacturer advocates driving at (160 km/h), recommended cold tire vehicle has not been driven for at least safe speeds and within posted speed inflation pressures are listed on the Tire three hours, or driven less than 1 mile limits. Where speed limits or conditions And Loading Information Placard located (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of are such that the vehicle can be driven at on driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge three hours. The cold tire inflation high speeds, maintaining correct tire of the driver's side door. inflation pressure is very important. pressure must not exceed the maximum When driving at speeds 100 mph Increased tire pressure and reduced inflation pressure molded into the tire (160 km/h) and above, increased tire vehicle loading may be required for sidewall. pressures and reduced vehicle loading high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to Check tire pressures more often if are required for high-speed vehicle your authorized tire dealer or original subject to a wide range of outdoor operation. equipment vehicle dealer for temperatures, as tire pressures vary with For driving speeds above 100 mph temperature changes. recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. (160 km/h) recommended cold tire Tire pressures change by approximately inflation pressures are listed below 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air under "High Speed Tire Inflation temperature change. Keep this in mind Warning! Pressure". Vehicle loading condition must when checking tire pressure inside a not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver + garage, especially in the Winter. three passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg) High speed driving with your vehicle under Example: If garage temperature = 68°F maximum load is dangerous. The added luggage). (20°C) and the outside temperature = strain on your tires could cause them to fail. 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation Youcould have a serious collision. Do not Warning! pressure should be increased by 3 psi drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for capacity at continuous speeds above every 12°F (7°C) for this outside 75 mph (120 km/h). High speed driving with your vehicle under temperature condition. maximum load is dangerous. The added Tire pressure may increase from 2 to strain on your tires could cause them to fail. 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO Youcould have a serious collision. NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

215 Recommended Cold Tire Inflation High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure Tires Wheel Pressure Front Rear Front Rear 34.8 psi/ 42.2 psi/ 245/35 ZR19 (93Y) XL 19x8.5J – – 240 kPa 291 kPa 31.9 psi/ 42.2 psi/ 265/35 R19 98V * – – – 220 kPa 291 kPa 31.9 psi/ 42.2 psi/ 285/30 ZR19 (98Y) XL 19x10J – – 220 kPa 291 kPa (*) Recommended tire size when tire chains are necessary. Refer to “Tire Chains” in “Servicing and Maintenance” for further information. Radial Ply Tires The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat an inch (6 mm). mode it has limited driving capabilities Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire and needs to be replaced immediately. A Warning! repairs and additional information. Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE flat tire is changed after driving with Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires underinflated tire condition, please Combining radial ply tires with other types that have experienced a loss of pressure replace the TPM sensor as it is not of tires on your vehicle will cause your should be replaced immediately with designed to be reused when driven under vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could another Run Flat tire of identical size and run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa)) condition. cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires service description (Load Index and in sets of four. Never combine them with Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure Note: TPM Sensor must be replaced other types of tires. sensor as well as it is not designed to be after driving the vehicle on a flat tire reused. condition. It is not recommended driving a vehicle Tire Repair Run Flat Tires — If Equipped loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer If your tire becomes damaged, it may be while a tire is in the run flat mode. repaired if it meets the following criteria: Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph See the tire pressure monitoring section The tire has not been driven on when (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation for more information. flat. pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is The damage is only on the tread referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run section of your tire (sidewall damage is Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation not repairable). pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). 216 Tire Spinning These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice Warning! appear as bands when the tread depth conditions, do not spin your vehicle's becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for When the tread is worn to the tread wear longer than 30 seconds continuously Tires and the spare tire should be replaced indicators, the tire should be replaced. without stopping. after six years, regardless of the remaining Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this tread. Failure to follow this warning can section for further information. result in sudden tire failure. Youcould lose Warning! control and have a collision resulting in Life Of Tire serious injury or death. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces The service life of a tire is dependent generated by excessive wheel speeds may upon varying factors including, but not Note: Wheel Valve Stem must be cause tire damage or failure. A tire could limited to: replaced as well when installing new tires explode and injure someone. Do not spin your due to wear and tear in existing tires. vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) Driving style. for more than 30 seconds continuously when Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a Tire pressure - Improper cold tire with as little exposure to light as spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. inflation pressures can cause uneven possible. Protect tires from contact with wear patterns to develop across the tire oil, grease, and gasoline. tread. These abnormal wear patterns will Replacement Tires Tread Wear Indicators reduce tread life, resulting in the need for Tread wear indicators are in the original earlier tire replacement. The tires on your new vehicle provide a equipment tires to help you in determining Distance driven. balance of many characteristics. They when your tires should be replaced. should be inspected regularly for wear Performance tires, tires with a speed and correct cold tire inflation pressures. rating of V or higher, and Summer tires The manufacturer strongly recommends typically have a reduced tread life. that you use tires equivalent to the Rotation of these tires per the vehicle originals in size, quality and performance scheduled maintenance is highly when replacement is needed. Refer to the recommended. paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size

0806104865NA designation of your tire. The Load Index Tire Tread and Speed Symbol for your tire will be 1 — Worn Tire found on the original equipment tire 2 — New Tire sidewall. 217 See the Tire Sizing Chart example found Never use a tire with a smaller load index Spare Tire Matching Original in the “Tire Safety Information” section of or capacity, other than what was originally Equipped Tire And Wheel — If this manual for more information relating equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a Equipped to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a smaller load index could result in tire tire. overloading and failure. Youcould lose Yourvehicle may be equipped with a It is recommended to replace the two control and have a collision. spare tire and wheel equivalent in look front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires and function to the original equipment Replacing just one tire can seriously having adequate speed capability can result tire and wheel found on the front or rear affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may replace a wheel, make sure that the control. be used in the tire rotation for your wheel’s specifications match those of the vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, original wheels. refer to an authorized tire dealer for the It is recommended you contact an Caution! recommended tire rotation pattern. authorized tire dealer or original Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped equipment dealer with any questions you Replacing original tires with tires of a may have on tire specifications or different size may result in false The compact spare is for temporary capability. Failure to use equivalent speedometer and odometer readings. emergency use only. Youcan identify if replacement tires may adversely affect your vehicle is equipped with a compact the safety, handling, and ride of your spare by looking at the spare tire SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Spare Tires — If Equipped vehicle. description on the Tire and Loading Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire Information Placard located on the Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please driver’s side door opening or on the Warning! refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire Emergency” for further information. descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, Example: T145/80D18 103M. or speed rating other than that specified for Caution! your vehicle. Some combinations of T, S = Temporary Spare Tire unapproved tires and wheels may change Since this tire has limited tread life, the Because of the reduced ground clearance, suspension dimensions and performance original equipment tire should be characteristics, resulting in changes to do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on steering, handling, and braking of your your vehicle at the first opportunity. vehicle. This can cause unpredictable limited use temporary spare installed. handling and stress to steering and Damage to the vehicle may result. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to suspension components. Youcould lose mount a conventional tire on the compact control and have a collision resulting in spare wheel, since the wheel is designed serious injury or death. Use only the tire and specifically for the compact spare tire. wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. 218 Do not install more than one compact limited use spare wheel. This label and remember to always wash when the spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any contains the driving limitations for this surfaces are not hot to the touch. given time. spare. This tire may look like the original Yourwheels are susceptible to equipped tire on the front or rear axle of deterioration caused by salt, sodium your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium Warning! this limited use spare tire affects vehicle chloride, etc., and other road chemicals handling. Since it is not the same as your used to melt ice or control dust on dirt original equipment tire, replace (or roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild Compact and collapsible spares are for repair) the original equipment tire and soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use temporary emergency use only. With these reinstall on the vehicle at the first harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can spares, do not drive more than 50 mph opportunity. (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have damage the wheel’s protective coating limited tread life. When the tread is worn to that helps keep them from corroding and the tread wear indicators, the temporary use tarnishing. spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to Warning! follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare Caution! tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, Avoid products or automatic car washes Full Size Spare — If Equipped do not drive more than the speed listed on that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to additives or harsh brushes. Many The full size spare is for temporary the cold tire inflation pressures listed on aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic emergency use only. This tire may look your Tire and Loading Information Placard car washes may damage the wheel's like the originally equipped tire on the located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the protective finish. Such damage is not front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace covered by the New Vehicle Limited not. This spare tire may have limited (or repair) the original equipment tire at the Warranty. Only car wash soap is recommended. tread life. When the tread is worn to the first opportunity and reinstall it on your tread wear indicators, the temporary use vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. full size spare tire needs to be replaced. When cleaning extremely dirty wheels Since it is not the same as your original including excessive brake dust, care must equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Wheel And Wheel Trim Care be taken in the selection of tire and wheel original equipment tire and reinstall on cleaning chemicals and equipment to All wheels and wheel trim, especially the vehicle at the first opportunity. prevent damage to the wheels. Select a aluminum and chrome plated wheels, non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for should be cleaned regularly using mild Limited Use Spare — If Equipped aluminum or chrome wheels. (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain The limited use spare tire is for their luster and to prevent corrosion. temporary emergency use only. This tire Wash wheels with the same soap solution is identified by a label located on the recommended for the body of the vehicle 219 Tire Types Caution! All Season Tires — If Equipped Warning! All Season tires provide traction for all Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. Winter). Traction levels may vary conditions. Youcould lose vehicle control, These products may damage the wheel's between different all season tires. All resulting in severe injury or death. Driving protective finish. Such damage is not season tires can be identified by the M+S, too fast for conditions also creates the covered by the New Vehicle Limited possibility of loss of vehicle control. Warranty. Only car wash soap is M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire recommended. sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely Snow Tires affect the safety and handling of your Note: If you intend parking or storing vehicle. Some areas of the country require the your vehicle for an extended period after use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, Summer Or Three Season Tires — If tires can be identified by a drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to Equipped “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire remove the water droplets from the sidewall. brake components. This activity will Summer tires provide traction in both If you need snow tires, remove the red rust on the brake rotors wet and dry conditions, and are not select tires equivalent SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE and prevent vehicle vibration when intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If in size and type to the braking. your vehicle is equipped with Summer original equipment tires, be aware these tires are not tires. Use snow tires Dark Or Low Gloss Wheels designed for Winter or cold driving only in sets of four; conditions. Install Winter tires on your failure to do so may vehicle when ambient temperatures are Caution! adversely affect the safety and handling less than 45°F (7°C) or if roads are of your vehicle. covered with ice or snow. For more Snow tires generally have lower speed information, contact an authorized If your vehicle is equipped with these ratings than what was originally equipped dealer. specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel with your vehicle and should not be cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. Summer tires do not contain the all They will permanently damage this finish operated at sustained speeds over season designation or mountain/ 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above and such damage is not covered by the New snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original ONLYUSING MILD SOAP AND WATERWITH Use Summer tires only in sets of four; equipment or an authorized tire dealer A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this failure to do so may adversely affect the for recommended safe operating speeds, is all that is required to maintain this finish. safety and handling of your vehicle. loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

220 While studded tires improve Tire Rotation Recommendations performance on ice, skid and traction Caution! Tire Rotations - Do Not Rotate Tires capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Due to different size tires and wheels on front and rear axles tire rotation is not Some states prohibit studded tires; To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, therefore, local laws should be checked observe the following precautions: possible for: before using these tire types. Because of restricted traction device 2.9 L V6 Engine Equipped with 19” clearance between tires and other tires and wheels Tire Chains (Traction Devices) suspension components, it is important that Use of traction devices require sufficient only traction devices in good condition are tire-to-body clearance. Follow these used. Broken devices can cause serious Caution! recommendations to guard against damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if damage. noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of Damage to the vehicle may occur if 19” front Note: the device before further use. and rear tires are rotated Traction device must be of proper Install device as tightly as possible and size for the tire, as recommended by the then retighten after driving about ½ mile In the case of irregular wear of the tires traction device manufacturer (0.8 km). identify the cause and correct it as soon Use on Rear Tires Only Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). as possible, by contacting an authorized dealer. Due to limited clearance, the Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns following traction devices are and large bumps, especially with a loaded recommended: vehicle. Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry For a 265/35R19 98V tire, use of a pavement. zero-clearance snow traction device recommended. Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method It is not possible to install traction of installation, operating speed, and devices on 285/30R19 tires. conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

221 DEPARTMENT OF practices, and differences in road laboratory test wheel. Sustained high TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM characteristics and climate. temperature can cause the material TIRE QUALITY GRADES Traction Grades of the tire to degenerate and reduce The following tire grading categories tire life, and excessive temperature The Traction grades, from highest to were established by the National can lead to sudden tire failure. The lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These Highway Traffic Safety grade C corresponds to a level of grades represent the tire's ability to Administration. The specific grade performance, which all passenger stop on wet pavement, as measured rating assigned by the tire's vehicle tires must meet under the under controlled conditions on manufacturer in each category is Federal Motor Vehicle Safety specified government test surfaces shown on the sidewall of the tires on Standard No. 109. Grades B and A of asphalt and concrete. A tire your vehicle. represent higher levels of marked C may have poor traction performance on the laboratory test All passenger vehicle tires must performance. conform to Federal safety wheel, than the minimum required by requirements in addition to these law. grades. Warning! Warning! SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a The traction grade assigned to this The temperature grade for this tire comparative rating, based on the tire is based on straight-ahead is established for a tire that is wear rate of the tire when tested braking traction tests, and does not properly inflated and not under controlled conditions on a include acceleration, cornering, overloaded. Excessive speed, specified government test course. hydroplaning, or peak traction under-inflation, or excessive For example, a tire graded 150 would characteristics. loading, either separately or in wear one and one-half times as well combination, can cause heat on the government course as a tire Temperature Grades buildup and possible tire failure. graded 100. The relative The temperature grades are A (the performance of tires depends upon highest), B, and C, representing the the actual conditions of their use, tire's resistance to the generation of however, and may depart heat and its ability to dissipate heat, significantly from the norm due to when tested under controlled variations in driving habits, service conditions on a specified indoor 222 STORING THE VEHICLE compact plastic sheets, as they do not If the vehicle is left inactive for longer allow humidity to evaporate from the than a month, the following precautions surface of the vehicle . should be observed: Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) Park the vehicle in an area that is above the standard prescribed pressure covered and dry, and well-ventilated if and check it periodically. possible. Slightly open the windows. Do not drain the engine cooling Check that the electric park brake is system. not activated. Any time the vehicle is left inactive for Carry out the procedure: “manual trunk two weeks or more, operate the air 09086S0001EM opening device” procedure described in conditioning system with engine idling Trunk Compartment this paragraph. for at least five minutes, setting external air and with fan set to maximum speed. Disconnect the negative battery This operation will ensure appropriate terminal and check the battery charge. lubrication for the system, thus Repeat this check once every three minimizing the possibility of damage to months during storage. the compressor when the system is If the battery is not disconnected from operated again. the electrical system, check its state of Note: After cycling the ignition to STOP charge every thirty days. and having closed the driver side door, Clean and protect the painted parts wait at least one minute before using protective wax. disconnecting the electrical supply from the battery. When reconnecting the Clean and protect the shiny metal electrical supply to the battery, make 0318134892US parts using special compounds available sure that the ignition is in the STOP Trunk Manual Release Cord commercially. position and the driver side door is 2. Make sure the free end of the cord Sprinkle talcum powder on the closed. remains outside the trunk when closing windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift Manual Trunk Opening Device the trunk lid. them off the glass. Proceed as follows if the battery needs Cover the vehicle with a fabric or to be disconnected: perforated plastic sheet, paying 1. From the trunk interior covering, particular care not to damage the painted rotate the plug counterclockwise of the surface by dragging any dust that may lock and extract the cord connected to it. have accumulated on it. Do not use 223 BODYWORK Preserving The Bodywork Protection Against Atmospheric Paint Agents Touch up abrasions and scratches The vehicle is equipped with the best immediately to prevent the formation of available technological solutions to rust. protect the bodywork against corrosion. Maintenance of paintwork consists of These include: washing the car: the frequency depends on the conditions and environment where Painting products and systems which the car is used. For example, it is give the vehicle resistance to corrosion advisable to wash the vehicle more often 0318135355US and abrasion. in areas with high levels of atmospheric Manual Release Cord Shown With Trunk pollution or salted roads. Closed Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) steel sheets, with high resistance to Some parts of the vehicle may be 3. The trunk can now be opened corrosion. covered with a matte paint which, in manually by pulling the cord. order to be maintained intact, requires Spraying of plastic parts, with a special care. 4. After releasing the trunk, rewind the protective function in the more exposed To correctly wash the vehicle, follow strap around the plug, put it back into its points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc. these instructions:

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE housing and turn it clockwise. Use of “open” boxed sections to If high pressure jets or cleaners are prevent condensation and pockets of used to wash the vehicle, keep a distance Caution! moisture which could favor the formation of at least 15 inches (40 cm) from the of rust inside. bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. The Manual Trunk Opening Device allows the Use of special films to protect against Build up of water could cause damage to trunk to be opened without a key, even if the abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing, the vehicle in the long term. vehicle is locked. Do not use this Device doors, etc.). unless the vehicle is parked in a secure area. To make it easier to remove any dirt Corrosion Warranty deposits in the area where the blades are normally located it is recommended to Yourvehicle is covered by Corrosion position the windshield wipers vertically Warranty against perforation due to rust (service position), for more information, of any original element of the structure refer to “Dealer Service” in this chapter. or bodywork. For the general terms of this warranty, refer to the Warranty Wash the bodywork using a low Booklet. pressure jet of water if possible.

224 Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy Windows Engine Compartment solution over the bodywork, frequently Use specific detergents and clean cloths At the end of every winter, wash the rinsing the sponge. to prevent scratching or altering the engine compartment thoroughly, taking Rinse well with water and dry with a transparency. care not to aim the jet of water directly at leather chamois. the electronic control units or at the windshield wiper motors. Have this Caution! Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door operation performed at a specialized frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) with workshop. special care, as water may stagnate more Wipe the rear window inside gently with a Note: The washing should take place easily in these areas. Do not wash the car cloth following the direction of the filaments with the engine cold and the ignition after it has been left in the sun or with the to avoid damaging the heating device. device in the STOP position. After the hood hot: this may alter the shine of the washing operation, make sure that the paintwork. Front Headlights various protections (e.g. rubber caps and Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in guards) have not been removed or the same way as the rest of the vehicle. Use a soft cloth soaked in water and detergent for washing . damaged. If washing the car in a service that moves the car, for cars with automatic Note: transmissions, PARK (P) must be cut out. Youhave to shut off the engine in the Never use aromatic substances (e.g. following conditions: car stopped, gasoline) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for transmission in NEUTRAL (N), push the cleaning the plastic lenses of the starter button for at least three seconds. headlights. Note: Avoid parking under trees; the When cleaning with a pressure resin dropped by trees makes the washer, keep the pressure washer at paintwork go opaque and increases the least eight inches (20 cm) away from the possibility of corrosion. headlights.

225 INTERIORS Plastic And Coated Parts Carbon Fiber Parts Periodically check the cleanliness of the Clean interior plastic parts with a damp To eliminate small scratches and marks interior, beneath the mats, which could cloth (if possible made from microfiber), on the carbon, contact your authorized cause oxidation of the sheet metal. and a solution of water and neutral, dealer. An improperly performed Seats And Fabric Parts non-abrasive detergent. operation may irreparably damage the To clean oily or persistent stains, use carbon. Remove dust with a soft brush or a specific products free from solvents and vacuum cleaner. It is advised to use a designed to maintain the original moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub the appearance and color of the components. seats with a sponge moistened with a solution of water and neutral detergent. Remove any dust using a microfiber cloth, if necessary moistened with water. Leather Seats The use of paper tissues is not Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or recommended as these may leave slightly damp cloth, without exerting too residues. much pressure. Genuine Leather Parts Remove any liquid or grease stains using Use only water and mild soap to clean an absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing. these parts. Never use alcohol or Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE alcohol-based products. cloth dampened with water and mild soap. If the stain persists, use specific Before using a specific product for products and observe the instructions cleaning interiors, make sure that it does carefully. not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based substances. Note: Never use alcohol. Make sure that the cleaning products used contain no alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in small quantities.

226 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

For the enthusiasts, the technician, or IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 228 those who just want to know every detail ENGINE ...... 229 of their vehicle, useful information on POWER SUPPLY ...... 230 understanding how your vehicle works is TRANSMISSION ...... 231 contained in this chapter and illustrated BRAKES ...... 232 with data, tables, and graphics. SUSPENSION ...... 233 STEERING SYSTEM...... 234 DIMENSIONS...... 235 WEIGHTS ...... 236 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 237 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 239 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 240 PERFORMANCE ...... 242

227 IDENTIFICATION DATA This number is also printed on the chassis Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) at the front left shock absorber and can Plate Vehicle Identification Number be seen by opening the engine The plates are located on the left side A The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) compartment hood. is stamped on a plate on the front left pillar and contain the data about: corner of the dashboard cover, which can Chassis number (VIN). be seen from outside the vehicle, through the windshield. Vehicle type (USA and Canada only). Color code. Place of manufacturing of the vehicle (USA and Mexico only). Vehicle manufacturing date. Maximum permitted weights. 10016S0002EM Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA Vehicle Identification Number and Canada only). TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

10016S0001EM Vehicle Identification Number

228 ENGINE

2.9L V6 Engine Cycle Four Number and position of cylinders 6/V Piston bore and stroke (mm) 86.5 × 82 Total displacement (cm³) 2891 Compression ratio 9.3:1 Maximum power (SAE) (kW) 375 Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 505 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 6500 Maximum torque (SAE) (Nm) 600 Maximum torque (SAE) (ft. lb) 443 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500 87 Octane Minimum, 91 Recommended, Fuel ethanol percentage is 0–15%.

229 POWER SUPPLY

Power supply Phased sequential electronic injection with knock control and variable 2.9L V6 Engine intake valve actuation TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

230 TRANSMISSION

Model Transmission Traction 2.9L V6 Engine Eight forward gears plus reverse Rear

231 BRAKES

Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake Disc Disc 2.9L V6 Engine or or Electric Carbon Ceramic disc Carbon Ceramic disc

Caution!

Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied. To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

232 SUSPENSION

Model Front Rear Independent wheel double-wishbone 2.9L V6 Engine Independent wheel with multilink system suspension

233 STEERING SYSTEM

Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type Rack and pinion with electric power 2.9L V6 Engine 37.10 ft (11.30 m) steering TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

234 DIMENSIONS

Dimensions Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

10106S0002EM

H I A C D E B F G Overall Overall Front Rear Overall Overall Front Track Rear Track Width (Incl. Width (Excl. Overhang Overhang Length Height Mirrors) Mirrors) 31.30 Inches 111.02 Inches 40.31 Inches 182.64 Inches 56.14 Inches 61.22 Inches 63.27 Inches 79.69 Inches 73.74 Inches 235 WEIGHTS

Weights (lbs) 2.9 V6 Engine Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and 3810 without optional equipment) Payload including the driver (*) 905 Maximum permitted loads (**) 155 – front axle 2260 – rear axle 2646 – total 4774 (*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

236 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated Gasoline Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) Many areas of the country require the This engine is designed or gasoline containing methanol are not use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to meet all emission the responsibility of the manufacturer to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. regulations, and and may void or not be covered under Reformulated gasoline contains provide satisfactory New Vehicle Limited Warranty. fuel economy and oxygenates and are specifically blended performance when to reduce vehicle emissions and improve CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications air quality. using high-quality Modifications that allow the engine to unleaded “Regular” The use of reformulated gasoline is run on Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or gasoline having a posted octane number recommended. Properly blended Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/ reformulated gasoline will provide to the engine, emissions, and fuel system 2 method. For optimal performance the improved performance and durability of components. Problems that result from use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” engine and fuel system components. running CNG or LP are not the gasoline is recommended in these Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends responsibility of the manufacturer and . may void or not be covered under the While operating on gasoline with the Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded New Vehicle Limited Warranty. required octane number, hearing a light gasoline with oxygenates such as knocking sound from the engine is not a ethanol. cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, Caution! see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine failure DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing and may void or not be covered by the methanol, or gasoline containing more than New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends Poor quality gasoline can cause problems may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system such as hard starting, stalling, and components, cause emissions to exceed the hesitations. If you experience these applicable standard, and/or cause the symptoms, try another brand of gasoline Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. before considering service for the Please observe pump labels as they should vehicle. clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

237 MMT In Gasoline Materials Added To Fuel Fuel System Cautions Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Besides using unleaded gasoline with the Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese- proper octane rating, gasolines that Caution! containing metallic additive that is contain detergents, corrosion and blended into some gasoline to increase stability additives are recommended. octane. Gasoline blended with MMT Using gasolines that have these additives Follow these guidelines to maintain your provides no performance advantage will help improve fuel economy, reduce vehicle’s performance: beyond gasoline of the same octane emissions, and maintain vehicle The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can number without MMT. Gasoline blended performance. impair engine performance and damage the with MMT reduces spark plug life and Designated TOP TIER emissions control system. reduces emissions system performance Detergent Gasoline in some vehicles. The manufacturer contains a higher level An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the recommends that gasoline without MMT of detergents to be used in your vehicle. The MMT content catalytic converter to overheat. If you further aide in notice a pungent burning odor or some light of gasoline may not be indicated on the minimizing engine and smoke, your engine may be out of tune or gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask fuel system deposits. malfunctioning and may require immediate your gasoline retailer whether the When available, the usage of TOP TIER service. Contact an authorized dealer for TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS gasoline contains MMT. MMT is Detergent gasoline is recommended. service assistance. prohibited in Federal and California Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of reformulated gasoline. The use of fuel additives, which are now TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. being sold as octane enhancers, is not Indiscriminate use of fuel system recommended. Most of these products cleaning agents should be avoided. Many contain high concentrations of methanol. of these materials intended for gum and Fuel system damage or vehicle varnish removal may contain active performance problems resulting from the solvents or similar ingredients. These can use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm void or not be covered under the New materials. Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Note: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

238 FLUID CAPACITIES 2.9L V6 Engine

U.S. Metric Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters Engine cooling system 2.95 Gallons 11.2 Liters Intercooler cooling system 1.4 Gallons 5.5 Liters Engine sump and filter 7.2 Quarts 7 Liters Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters Automatic transmission – – Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195 – – Main body: 0.8 Quarts Main body: 0.8 Liters Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV Left TV: 0.5 Quarts Left TV: 0.5 Liters Right TV: 0.6 Quarts Right TV: 0.6 Liters RDU 230-LSD differential – – RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped) – – RDU 210/215-LSD differential – –

239 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Yourvehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration. 2.9L V6 — Engine Lubrication

Features Specification Replacement interval 5W-40 FPT 9.55535-GH2 ACEA C3 According to the Maintenance Plan MS-12991 API SN

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

240 Chassis Lubrication

Use Features Specification Applications ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission Lubricants and greases SAE 75W-85 API GL-5 Synthetic Differential and reduction units FPW9.55550-DA8 lubricant RDU 230-TV / 2.9 V6 engine Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes CUNA NC 956-16 Use rate 50% Not mixable with Engine coolant MS.90032 ASTMD3306 different formulation products. (*) To be used diluted or undiluted in Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043 windshield washer/wiper systems R1234yf or R134yf (depending on HVAC –– market) (*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

241 PERFORMANCE Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Acceleration from Model Maximum speed mph 0–60 mph/0-100 km/h sec. 2.9L V6 Engine 191 * 3.8 * *Based on manufacturer testing. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

242 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . .244 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 244 WARRANTY INFORMATION .....246 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . .246 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . .247

243 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to the SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE manufacturer's customer center should The manufacturer and its authorized include the following information: Prepare For The Appointment dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Owner's name and address If you are having warranty work done, be with our products and services. sure to bring the right papers with you, as Owner's telephone number (home and well as your warranty folder. All work to Warranty service must be done by an office) authorized dealer. We strongly be performed may not be covered by the Authorized dealer name warranty. Discuss additional charges with recommend that you take the vehicle to the service manager. Keep a maintenance an authorized dealer. They know your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) vehicle the best, and are most concerned log of your vehicle's service history, as Vehicle delivery date and mileage this can often provide a clue to the that you get prompt and high quality current problem. service. The manufacturer's authorized Alfa Romeo Customer Center dealer have the facilities, factory-trained Prepare A List technicians, special tools, and the latest P.O.Box 21–8004 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Make a written list of your vehicle's information to ensure the vehicle is fixed Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 problems or the specific work you want correctly and in a timely manner. Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA done. If you've had an accident or work This is why you should always talk to an (1-844-253-2872) authorized dealer service manager first. done that is not on your maintenance log, Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada) let the service advisor know. Most matters can be resolved with this process. P.O.Box 1621 Be Reasonable With Requests If for some reason you are still not Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 If you list a number of items and you must satisfied, talk to the general manager or Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English) have your vehicle by the end of the day, owner of the authorized dealer. They Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French) discuss the situation with the service want to know if you need assistance. advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you If an authorized dealer is unable to may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal resolve the concern, you may contact the daily charge. If you need a rental, it is manufacturer's customer center. advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

244 Customer Assistance For The Hearing manufacturer's Service Contract Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) National Customer Hotline at Warning! 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, To assist customers who have hearing call (877) 230-0563 English / (877) difficulties, the manufacturer has 515-9112 French). installed special TDD Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines (Telecommunication Devices for the The manufacturer will not stand behind only), some of its constituents, and certain any service contract that is not the vehicle components contain, or emit, Deaf) equipment at its customer center. chemicals known to the State of California Any hearing or speech impaired manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract to cause cancer and birth defects, or other customer, who has access to a TDD or a reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the other than the manufacturer's service contained in vehicles and certain products of United States, can communicate with the contract. If you purchased a service component wear contain, or emit, chemicals manufacturer by dialing contract that is not a manufacturer's known to the State of California to cause 1-800-380-2479. service contract, and you require service cancer and birth defects, or other after the manufacturer's New Vehicle reproductive harm. Canadian residents with hearing Limited Warranty expires, please refer to difficulties that require assistance can the contract documents, and contact the use the special needs relay service person listed in those documents. offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for We appreciate that you have made a Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to major investment when you purchased connect with a Bell Relay Service the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also operator. made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are Service Contract absolutely delighted with the ownership Youmay have purchased a service experience. Youwill be pleased with their contract for a vehicle to help protect you sincere efforts to resolve any warranty from the high cost of unexpected repairs issues or related concerns. after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the 245 WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the See the Warranty Information Booklet, In The 50 United States And Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at for the terms and provisions of FCA US Washington, D.C. 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties 1-800-424-9153); or go to applicable to this vehicle and market. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: cause injury or death, you should Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New immediately inform the National Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Highway Traffic Safety Washington, D.C. 20590. Youcan Administration (NHTSA) in addition also obtain other information about to notifying FCA US LLC. motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov . If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an In Canada CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE investigation, and if it finds that a If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect exists in a group of safety defect, you should contact the vehicles, it may order a recall and Customer Service Department remedy campaign. However, NHTSA immediately. Canadian customers cannot become involved in individual who wish to report a safety defect to problems between you, your the Canadian government should authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ .

246 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Owner's Manuals To order the following manuals, you may Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled These Owner's Manuals have been use either the website or the phone with diagrams, charts and detailed prepared with the assistance of service numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, illustrations. These practical manuals and engineering specialists to acquaint American Express, and Discover orders make it easy for students and technicians you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. are accepted. to find and fix problems on Included are starting, operating, computer-controlled vehicle systems and emergency and maintenance procedures Service Manuals features. They show exactly how to find as well as specifications, capabilities and These comprehensive Service Manuals and correct problems the first time, using safety tips. provide the information that students step-by-step troubleshooting and Call toll free at: and professional technicians need in drivability procedures, proven diagnostic diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem tests and a complete list of all tools and 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) solving, maintaining, servicing, and equipment. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the Or vehicle, system, and/or components is Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: written in straightforward language with www.techauthority.com illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

247 This page is intentionally left blank

248 INDEX Air Pressure Cargo Tie-Downs ...... 50 Accessories Purchased By The Tires...... 214 Certification Label ...... 164 Owner...... 3 Alarm Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 208 Active Aerodynamics ...... 55 Security Alarm ...... 19 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Active Safety Systems ...... 90 Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) .....143 Indicator Light) ...... 86 Active TorqueVectoring (ATV) Alfa DNA System...... 140 Checking Levels ...... 196 System ...... 92 Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System ....90 Checking YourVehicle For Safety . . .126 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Automatic Headlights ...... 33 Checks, Safety ...... 126 (Cruise Control) ...... 149 Automatic Temperature Control Child Restraint ...... 117 Additives, Fuel ...... 238 (ATC)...... 42 Child Restraints AFS Function ...... 34 Automatic Transmission ...... 135 Booster Seats ...... 119 AirBag...... 109 Auxiliary Driving Systems ...... 93 Child Seat Installation ...... 125 Air Bag Operation ...... 110 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Air Bag Warning Light ...... 108 B-Pillar Location ...... 211 Belt ...... 123 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 111 Back-Up Camera ...... 161 Infant And Child Restraints .....118 Enhanced Accident Battery ...... 198 LATCH Positions ...... 120 Response...... 114,190 Battery Recharging ...... 199 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Event Data Recorder (EDR) .....190 Belts, Seat ...... 127 Children ...... 120 Front Air Bag ...... 109 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 93 Older Children And Child Restraints ...... 119 If Deployment Occurs ...... 113 Bodywork (Cleaning And Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 110 Maintenance) ...... 224 Seating Positions ...... 120 Maintaining YourAir Bag Brakes ...... 232 Using The TopTether Anchorage . .125 System ...... 116 Brake Fluid Level ...... 198 Clean Air Gasoline ...... 237 Maintenance ...... 116 Bulbs, Light ...... 128 Cleaning Redundant Air Bag Warning Wheels ...... 219 Light ...... 109 Camera, Rear ...... 161 Climate Control ...... 40,43 Side Air Bags ...... 111 Carbon Fiber Active Aero Front Compact Spare Tire ...... 218 Transporting Pets ...... 126 Spoiler ...... 55 Contract, Service...... 245 Air Bag Light...... 108,127 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 126 Courtesy Mirror Light (Bulb Emergency, In Case Of Fluids And Lubricants ...... 240 Replacement) ...... 173 Jacking ...... 207 Fog Lights, Rear ...... 33 Cruise Control Jump Starting ...... 184 Forward Collision Warning ...... 95

INDEX (Speed Control) ...... 147,149 Overheating ...... 187 Front Light Cluster With Main Beam Cupholders ...... 55 Tow Hooks ...... 189 Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights Customer Assistance ...... 244 Towing...... 188 (Bulb Replacement)...... 173 Emission Control System Front Mobile Spoiler (Alfa Active Daytime Running Lights...... 33 Maintenance...... 86 Aero) ...... 55 Deck Lid Engine ...... 229 Front Seat Electric Heating ...... 27 Power Release ...... 49 Engine Coolant Level ...... 198 Front Seats (Power Seats) ...... 25 Defroster, Windshield ...... 127 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 126 Fuel Dimensions ...... 235 Additives ...... 238 Fuel Requirements ...... 237 Dimmer Switch Clean Air ...... 237 Jump Starting ...... 185 Headlight...... 38 Ethanol ...... 237 Overheating ...... 187 Direction Indicators (Changing A Gauge ...... 59 Temperature Gauge ...... 59 Bulb)...... 173 Materials Added ...... 238 Engine Compartment ...... 196 Disable VehicleTowing ...... 188 Methanol ...... 237 Engine Compartment (Washing) . . . .225 Doors...... 20 Fuse Boxes ...... 176 Driving Modes ...... 141 Engine Oil Level Check ...... 197 Fuses (Replacement) ...... 175 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System ...... 92 Enhanced Accident Response Feature ...... 114,190 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ....52 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 237 Electric Park Brake...... 133 Environmental Protection Systems. . .55 Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 237 Electric Steering Wheel Heating.....31 Ethanol ...... 237 Gauges Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Exhaust Gas Cautions ...... 126 Speedometer ...... 59 Control) ...... 147 Exhaust System ...... 126 Tachometer ...... 59 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Exterior Lights ...... 33,128 System ...... 90 General Information ...... 155 Emergency Flashers Glove Compartment Light (Bulb In Case Of ...... 170,181 Turn Signals ...... 128 Replacement) ...... 174 Emergency Refuelling ...... 187 Fluid Leaks ...... 128 Glove Compartment Storage ...... 51 Instrument Panel Daytime Running ...... 33 GVWR...... 164 Features ...... 58 Exterior ...... 33,128 Interior And Instrument Lights . . .37,38 Fog...... 33 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 170 Interior Lights...... 36 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 170 Head Restraints ...... 29 Interiors (Cleaning)...... 226 High Beam/Low Beam Select ....34 Head Rests ...... 29 Internal Equipment ...... 51 Interior ...... 36 Headlights...... 33 Cupholders ...... 55 Park...... 33 Automatic ...... 33 Turn Signals ...... 35,128 Delay ...... 34 Jacking And Tire Changing ...... 207 Loading Vehicle ...... 164 High Beam ...... 34 Jump Starting ...... 184 Tires...... 211 Switch ...... 33 Locks Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 21 Headlights (Cleaning) ...... 225 Child Protection ...... 24 Passive Entry ...... 21 Heated Mirrors ...... 32 Luggage Compartment Light Hill Start Assist (HSA) System...... 92 Keys...... 14 (Bulb Replacement)...... 174 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ....52 Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 35 Hood Malfunction Indicator Light Closing ...... 48 Lane Change Assist ...... 35 (Check Engine)...... 86 Opening ...... 48 LaneSense...... 158 Manual Service ...... 247 Hood Release ...... 48 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 103 Latches...... 128 Methanol...... 237 Identification Data ...... 228 Leaks, Fluid ...... 128 Mirrors Automatic Dimming ...... 32 Ignition...... 16 Life Of Tires ...... 217 Electric Powered ...... 32 Switch ...... 16 Light Bulbs...... 128 Exterior Folding ...... 32 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...... 18 Types Of Bulbs ...... 171 Heated ...... 32 In Case Of Emergency ...... 170 Lights...... 128 Rearview ...... 32 Installing Electrical/Electronic AirBag...... 108,127 Devices...... 3 Ambient ...... 37 OBD System ...... 86 Instrument Cluster Courtesy/Reading ...... 36,37 Display ...... 60 Occupant Restraints...... 101 Operator Manual Refueling Procedure ...... 163 Energy Management Feature . . . .106 Owner's Manual ...... 247 Refueling The Vehicle ...... 162 Front Seat ...... 102,103 Refuelling ...... 239 Inspection ...... 127 INDEX Paintwork (Cleaning And Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 102 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .105 Maintenance) ...... 224 Remote Keyless Entry...... 14 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 103 Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System ....91 Remote Starting System ...... 130 Pregnant Women ...... 106 ParkSense System ...... 156 Remote Trunk Release ...... 49 Pretensioners ...... 106 Passive Entry ...... 21 Replacement Tires ...... 217 Rear Seat ...... 103 Performance (Top Speed)...... 242 Replacing A Bulb ...... 170 Reminder ...... 102 Pets...... 126 Replacing An External Bulb ...... 173 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 106 Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...... 211 Replacing An Internal Bulb ...... 173 Untwisting Procedure ...... 105 Power Reporting Safety Defects ...... 246 Seats ...... 25 Deck Lid Release ...... 49 Restraints, Child ...... 117 Adjustment ...... 25 Seats ...... 25 Rims And Tires ...... 207 Head Restraints ...... 29 Power Supply ...... 230 Height Adjustment ...... 25 Power Windows ...... 47 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle...... 127 Power...... 25 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . .106 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle.....128 Tilting ...... 25 Pretensioners Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 246 Security Alarm ...... 19 Seat Belts ...... 106 Safety Information, Tire...... 207 Service Assistance...... 244 Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity ...... 223 Safety Tips ...... 126 Service Contract ...... 245 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 126 Service Manuals ...... 247 Radial Ply Tires ...... 216 Saving Fuel ...... 165 Servicing Procedures ...... 200 Radio Frequency Scheduled Servicing ...... 192 Shoulder Belts ...... 103 General Information ...... 16,18,24 Scheduled Servicing Program Signals, Turn...... 128 (2.9 V6 Gasoline Engine Radio Transmitters And Mobile Snow Chains...... 221 Phones ...... 4 Versions) ...... 193 Snow Tires...... 220 Rear Camera ...... 161 Seat Belts ...... 102,127 Spare Tires ...... 218,219 Rear Cross Path ...... 93 Child Restraints ...... 117 Speed Control Reformulated Gasoline ...... 237 Accel/Decel ...... 148 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...... 151 Tire Markings ...... 207 Traction Control System (TCS)...... 91 Cancel ...... 149 Tire Safety Information ...... 207 Transmission ...... 231 Distance Setting (ACC Only) . . . .152 Tire Service Kit ...... 181 Transporting Animals ...... 166 Resume ...... 148 Tires ...... 128,214,218,222 Transporting Passengers ...... 166 Set...... 148 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 217 Transporting Pets ...... 126 Speed Control Air Pressure ...... 214 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 217 (Cruise Control) ...... 147,149 Compact Spare ...... 218 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ...... 49 Speed Limiter...... 146 Flat Changing ...... 181 Turn Signals ...... 35 Starting General Information ...... 214,218 Button ...... 16 High Speed ...... 215 Uconnect Settings Starting The Engine ...... 130 Inflation Pressure ...... 214 Customer Programmable Features ...... 21 Steering Life Of Tires ...... 217 Tilt Column...... 31 Passive Entry Programming .....21 Load Capacity ...... 211 Wheel, Heated ...... 31 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 222 Quality Grading ...... 222 Wheel, Tilt ...... 31 Universal Garage Door Opener Radial ...... 216 Steering System ...... 234 (HomeLink)...... 52 Replacement ...... 217 Stop/Start System...... 144 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt. . . .105 Safety ...... 207,214 Storage Use Of The Owner’s Manual ...... 5 Sizes ...... 208 Console...... 54 Snow Tires ...... 220 Vehicle Changes/Alterations ...... 3 Glove Compartment ...... 51 Spare Tires ...... 218,219 Vehicle Identification Number .....228 Suggestions For Driving...... 165 Spinning ...... 217 Vehicle Loading ...... 164,211 Sun Visor ...... 51 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 217 Vent Operation ...... 40 Supplemental Restraint System – AirBag...... 109 Tow Hooks Emergency ...... 189 Suspension ...... 233 Warranty Information ...... 246 Towing Symbols ...... 6 Washer Fluid For Disabled Vehicle ...... 188 Windshield/Headlights...... 198 TowingTrailers ...... 165 Weights ...... 236 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...... 50 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...... 219 Tire And Loading Information System)...... 99 Placard ...... 211 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...... 219 Wheels And Tires ...... 207 Windows (Cleaning) ...... 225 Windshield Defroster ...... 127 INDEX Windshield Wiper Replacing Blades ...... 202 Windshield Wiper/Washer Smart Washing Function ...... 39 Windshield Wipers ...... 38 Wrecker Towing...... 188

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- EQUIPMENT normal may require special precautions. FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a Special design considerations are incorporated into this All installations should be checked for possible interfer- FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio ence between the communications equipment and the available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please DRIVING AND ALCOHOL frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone vehicle’s electronic systems. disregard any features and equipment described in this Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of equipment must be installed properly by trained person- manual that are not on this vehicle. accidents. nel. The following must be observed during installation. WARNING: Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design The positive power connection should be made directly alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- Operating, servicing and maintaining a to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation The negative power connection should be made to body passenger vehicle or off-road highway drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals portation. factured. This connection should not be fused. including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used the State of California to cause cancer and Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may birth defects or other reproductive harm. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on To minimize exposure, avoid breathing slower, and your judgment is impaired when you vehicles so equipped. exhaust, do not idle the engine except as have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC The antenna cable should be as short as practical and necessary, service your vehicle in a routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use well-ventilated area and wear gloves or only fully shielded coaxial cable. wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

3391101 Cover.indd 2 7/19/18 12:38 PM 7/19/18 12:38 PM QUADRIFOGLIO OWNER’S MANUAL OWNER’S QUADRIFOGLIO 2019

2019 GIULIA QUADRIFOGLIO Printed in U.S.A. Printed ©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. US LLC. ©2018 FCA S.p.A., used with permission. Group Marketing of FCA ROMEO is a registered trademark ALFA 19GA-126-AA 19GA-126-AA ROMEO GIULIA ALFA QUADRIFOGLIO First Edition Manual Owner’s 3391101 Cover.indd 1